User manual | GE Spectra Series, 8000-Line motor control center Application and Selection Guide

GE Electrical Distribution & Control

Spectra Series™ and 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers

Application and

Selection Guide



The General Electric Spectra Series™ and 8000-Line motor control centers provide an economical means of centralizing motor starters and related control equipment. It permits combination motor control units, feeder tap units, distribution transformers, lighting panels, interlocking relays, programmable control, metering and other miscellaneous devices to be contained in a single floor-mounted structural assembly fed from a common enclosed main bus.

GE motor control centers are constructed of standardized heavy gauge vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal buses, wiring channels and compartmented control units.

Shipping splits are bolted together to form a single line-up assembly. Units are mounted and wired in accordance with the level of factory wiring purchased. The entire center may be powered by incoming line connection at a single point. Where possible, motor control centers bear UL section and unit labels.

The purpose of this publication is to simplify the selection of

GE motor control centers. The following logic flow chart lists basic items which must be considered for each application.

PRODUCT FEATURES

NEMA CLASS

APPLICABLE CODES

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT RATING

BUS TYPE AND CAPACITY

ENCLOSURE TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

INCOMING LINE TERMINATION AND MAINS

STARTERS

FEEDERS

SPECIAL FEATURES REQUIRED

SPECIAL CIRCUIT AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS

General

Structure

Mains, Feeders,

Incoming Lines

Starters

Miscellaneous Units

Solid-State Drives

Components

Application Data

Typical Circuits

Specifications

General

Programmable Logic Control

G

➡

H

➡

J

➡

K

➡

L

➡

A

➡

B

➡

C

➡

D

➡

E

➡

F

➡

A-1




STANDARD DESIGN FEATURES

Design flexibility, performance, personnel and equipment protection, ease of maintenance and installation are all contained in the Spectra Series™. Spectra Series™ features, such as separate wiring troughs, split-type terminal boards, isolated bus, drawout starter units, operating mechanisms, and provisions for starter interchangeability, are designed for a high level of reliability and convenience.

These steel-enclosed control centers can be joined together to centralize and protect the most complex systems of industrial auxiliary drives, or the simplest of fan- or pump-motor controls.

As the need arises, additional sections can be added to an existing lineup.

General

Barriers located in front of the main horizontal bus isolate the bus from the top horizontal wireway. Maintenance personnel can easily gain entrance to the top horizontal wireway of the control center without danger of contact with a live bus.

Barriers furnished with 2-inch main bus systems use a sliding panel. After de-energizing the bus, maintenance personnel may slide back the panels to give ready access to the main bus for inspection of bolted connections. Main bus splicing is accomplished in this area with the hardware already in place. 4-inch main bus systems have stationary removable barriers

An incoming-line terminal compartment can be located at the top or bottom of a vertical section to allow cable termination with minimum bending. The standard 600-ampere incoming line terminal compartment shown is furnished with 2 mechanical type lugs per phase. Other incoming line terminal compartments are available for main bus ampacities up to 2500 amperes.

A-2


Motor Control Centers General

New doors mounted on the case feature a removable hinge pin providing easy door removal and accurate alignment, in

Spectra Series™.

A

High density door bracket mounts up to 8 NEMA pilot devices in Spectra Series™. Bracket swings open to allow easy access to unit components, wiring and terminal blocks.

FRONT

VERTICAL BUS

REAR

VERTICAL BUS

In back-to-back single section construction, two independent vertical bus assemblies eliminate the need for reversing the phase sequence of front and rear mounted units.

A polyester-reinforced “sandwich” insulates and isolates the vertical bus and helps prevent the spread of faults from starter and feeder units to vertical or horizontal bus. Small stab openings provide effective isolation. 65 kA short circuit bracing is standard for Spectra Series™ MCC.

A-3




General

Stab connections are made with wedge-shaped silver-plated copper unit power stabs which are under double spring pressure and engage the vertical bus to provide positive contact and expand under short-circuit stress to increase contact pressure.

Design maintains common unit interface between 7700 Line,

8000 Line, and Spectra Series™ MCCS.

All combination starters and feeder units of plug-in construction utilize a positive guidance system combined with a mechanical insertion means. This unique GE design grounds the unit to the structure and provides positive electrical connection between the unit stabs and the vertical bus.

High density two-piece cam-operated pull-apart control terminal boards feature up to 18 points in 12" high units. External and internal unit connections are made on opposite sides, allowing the unit to be withdrawn without disconnecting control wiring.

Accommodates up to (2) #12 AWG wires with ring, fork or bare terminations. Rated 25 Amps, 600 Vac. Meets NEC Article 430-74.

Large isolated wire trough provides a 4

5

/

8

-inch x 8

1

/

8

-inch area to “lay in” wire and make control and load connections. A separate removable door, adjacent to drawout units, makes wiring installation and inspection easy. The door can be opened without disturbing adjacent unit doors. 8

5

/

8

-inch x 8

1

/

8

- inch wire troughs are available with 24-inch wide enclosures.

A-4



Units can be withdrawn to a disconnected position and padlocked for maintenance. Old style “B Block” terminal boards are still available as an option. All Spectra Series™ units and sections are fully compatible with 7700 and 8000 Line units.

A

An interlock release system is provided so that – if it becomes necessary for maintenance purposes – the disconnect may be closed with the door open. A by-pass is provided to allow opening the door with the disconnect closed. Only qualified per-

sonnel familiar with the equipment should use the interlock release and by-pass features.

The vertically mounted integral handle can be locked in the

OFF position with up to three padlocks. A drilling pattern is furnished, allowing the handle to be modified for locking in the ON position with a single padlock. This modification should only be made after the user determines it is desirable to lock the disconnect in the ON position. Padlock to have maximum

3

/

8

-inch shackle.

For flexibility, standard Size 1 and Size 2 FVNR starters are interchangeable in the same 12-inch high space unit. This design allows quick, easy field changes when modifications are desired after installation.

New front

1

/

4

-turn latches for secure installation and visual engagement

A new paint finish is applied to all un-plated steel parts. The powder coating process withstands 1000 Hr. salt spray tests and provides lasting beauty and protection.

A-5




OPTIONAL CUSTOMIZING FEATURES

General

Vertical Ground Bus and Unit Stab

Vertical copper ground bus allows direct grounding of unit saddles to the equipment ground bus. A unit ground bus stab engages the vertical ground bus before the unit power stabs engage the vertical bus.

A load vertical ground bus is available for customer cable grounding. Termination points are located at the rear of the vertical wireway, next to starter/feeder lugs.

Vertical Bus Shutter Mechanism

A vertical bus shutter mechanism can be supplied which covers the vertical bus stab area when a plug-in starter or feeder is withdrawn. This feature may also be added to existing 7700-

Line, 8000-Line and Spectra Series™ motor control centers. Cap plugs are available to close unused stab openings.

Power-Off Insertion or Withdrawal

Feature

Provides power-OFF insertion or withdrawal for plug-in combination starter or feeder units. A slide, mounted to the starter frame, coupled with the operating handle, inhibits access to the driving screw until the primary disconnect is open or OFF.

A-6



New Drawing Software

Windows™-based Engineering Drawing System creates highquality detailed front, top, bottom, and side views as well as specific device information.

A

Drawing Holder

An optional drawing holder allows you to mount complete wiring diagrams inside doors.

Nameplates

Unit service designation nameplates are furnished when specified. Nameplates can be supplied as blanks suitable for field engraving, or engraved at the factory.

The standard unit service designation nameplate is of 2-ply thermoplastic material, black face with white core, 1-inch x 3inch, fastened with non-corrosive nylon clips. Plated steel screws are available as an option. One to three lines of white letters on a black background can be engraved with 0.18-inch high characters. Lines 1 and 3 can have a maximum of 19 characters and line 2, 15 characters.

A 2-inch x 6-inch master nameplate mounted on the top left wireway cover of each motor control center lineup can be supplied if requested. One line of 6 characters is possible with 1inch high letters; with

1

/

2

-inch high letters, two lines of 12 characters each are possible. The standard is white letters on a black background.

Refer to the factory for special nameplates.

Wire and Cable

Standard control and power wire includes flame-retardant,

(VW-1) moisture-heat-and oil-resistant thermoplastic insulation rated 600 volts, with stranded copper conductors, types MTW and THW.

Standard Colors are:

Red –AC Control

Blue –DC Control

Black –AC/DC Power

Green –Ground

White –Neutral

Optional wiring available includes SIS heat-resistant synthetic rubber-covered switchboard wire and XHHW flame-retardant cross-linked synthetic polymer, both rated 600 volts with stranded copper conductors, and a VW-1 flame rating (no PVC).

Note:

• Not all colors are available with optional wiring.

A-7



NEMA CLASS OF DIAGRAMS AND WIRING

Motor control centers are classified by NEMA as follows:

NEMA CLASS I DEFINITION

➀

Class I motor control centers consist essentially of a mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly. They include connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units.

They do not include interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices, nor do they include control system engineering.

Diagrams of the individual units only are supplied.

NEMA CLASS II DEFINITION

➀

Class II motor control centers consist of a grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units designed to form a

COMPLETE CONTROL SYSTEM. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices in addition to the connections from the horizontal common power bus to the units.

The control manufacturer shall provide a suitable diagram to illustrate operation of the control associated with the motor control center.

NEMA CLASS IS AND IIS DEFINITION

➀

Class IS and IIS motor control centers shall be the same as

Class I and II motor control centers except custom drawings shall be provided in lieu of standard drawings.

➀ From NEMA Standard ICS-2-322.08.

Examples of custom drawings are:

Special identifications for electrical devices

Special terminal numbering designations

Special sizes of drawings

The drawings supplied by the manufacturer shall convey the same information as drawing provided with Class I and II motor control centers, additionally modified as specified by the user.

WHEN TO SPECIFIY CLASS I

Specify NEMA Class I control centers for independently operated motors requiring no interlocking or other interconnection between units.

WHEN TO SPECIFY CLASS II

When factory interconnections are desired to provide such functions as sequencing and other interlocking or interconnection, the control centers required are NEMA Class II.

WHEN TO SPECIFY CLASS IS AND IIS

When custom drawings are desired to show special device identification, special terminal numbering, or special diagram size, etc. the control centers required are Class IS or IIS.

The NEMA classes are sub-divided into A, B and C depending on the type wiring furnished, with type B further having type B-D for customer load wiring direct to the device and B-T for customer wiring to a load TB (size 1, 2 or 3 starters). NOTE: For feeders and large starters, customer must wire direct to unit device terminals.

WIRING FEATURES BY NEMA CLASSIFICATION

Type of Power or Control Termination Furnished

Pull-apart and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter–Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4

Stationary and numbered control terminal boards on unit starter – Sizes 5, 6 and 7

Pull-apart and numbered power terminal boards on unit starter –Sizes 1 and 2. Stationary terminal boards on Size 3 (On Type A wiring: Same type of numbered terminals on starter itself for Sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4)

Numbered terminals on starter itself for power connection with no power terminal boards –

Sizes, 5, 6 and 7

Stationary master terminal boards (Top, bottom or rear of section)

For control – Sizes 1 thru 5

For power – Sizes 1 thru 3

Unit terminal boards for feeder tap units and distribution panels

Starter-unit-mounted pilot devices internally wired to starter – Sizes 1 thru 7

Terminal board points for remote devices (Excluding extra tie points)

Master Terminal-board wiring connections

Factory-wired interconnections between units in the same motor control center

Type of Drawings Furnished

Outline and summary sheet (Schedule of units)

Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points (Terminal boards not furnished on Type A)

Unit elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal points and interconnections to other units and/or to the first level of remote devices.

Schedule of wires to master terminal blocks

Custom drawings as specified by user

A computerized manufacturing process necessitates that the

CR8000-Line motor control center standard unit numbering system be followed to identify the section and location of each unit.

This is explained in detail in application data (Section J). It greatly simplifies wire tracing of interconnection wires, and is

A

No

No

Class I

B

Yes

Yes

C

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

A

No

No

Class IS

B

Yes

Yes

C

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Class II

B C

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Class IIS

B C

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

No Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes Yes

No Yes

Yes Yes beneficial to the application of programmable control. The

Outline and Summary drawing furnished with the equipment cross references the unit numbers and customer unit designations when specified.

A-8



CODES AND STANDARDS

Motor control centers are manufactured to NEMA standard ICS

2-322 and are eligible to receive the Underwriters Laboratories listing mark under standard UL 845. Vertical sections and units which have been listed with UL will bear the listing mark. Since vertical sections and units are listed independently, it is possible to have combinations of listed and non-listed sections and units within the same control center. Sections and units which will be shipped with the UL listing mark are identified in the appropriate sections of this publication.

The National Electrical code covers installation of electric conductors and equipment for installations identified in the NEC Article

90. The NEC is not intended as a design specification and acceptance of an installed motor control center by a local code authority is dependent on factors independent of the equipment as shipped from the factory. In general, equipment which bears the UL listing mark can be installed to meet the NEC. Where 100 percent UL listed equipment is mandatory or there are other special code requirements refer to the factory for verification.

The NEC defines several types of control circuits and the overcurrent protection required for each type. The following paragraphs provide a general reference to the NEC Article applicable for the more common control circuits.

NEC Articles 430-72(a) and (b) cover motor control circuits tapped from the load side of a motor branch-circuit short-circuit protective device (unit disconnect). Control circuit conductors from such a tapped control circuit shall be protected in accordance with

NEC Table 430-72(b), which lists the maximum fuse or circuit breaker rating vs. conductor size.

Motor control circuits other than such tapped control circuits

(common control transformers or external power source) shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with Section 725-12 or

725-35, as applicable, for the type power source and field wiring conductor sizes.

Where a motor control circuit transformer is provided, the transformer should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 430-

72(c). Transformers other than motor control circuit transformers should be protected in accordance with NEC Article 450-3(b).

A

Section Label Unit Label

In addition, CSA labeling per CSA 22.2-14 Industrial Equipment is also available when all devices are CSA approved - refer to factory.

A-9



SHORT CIRCUIT CONSIDERATIONS

ALL RATINGS IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS

The NEMA Motor Control Center Standard ICS-2-322 defines the short-circuit rating of a motor control center as follows:

“The motor control center short-circuit rating shall be the maximum available rms symmetrical current in amperes permissible at its line terminals. It shall be computed as the sum of the short-circuit current contributions of the motors connected to the motor control center and the maximum available current, including all other short-circuit current contributions of the supply system at the point of connection to the motor control center.”

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUS

Fig. 1

Figure 1 illustrates simply the basis of determining the available short-circuit current. The individual short-circuit current ratings of the main bus extensions, combination-controller units, and feedertap units must equal of exceed available short-circuit current.

Is is the short-circuit current available from the system at the point where the motor control center is connected. Im is the shortcircuit current contribution of the motors connected to the motor control center. If exact information is lacking, the motor contribution can be estimated at four times (4X) the continuous-current rating of the main horizontal bus. Isc is the available short-circuit current to be used as the basis for selection. Thus: Isc = Is + Im.

High available short-circuit currents of modern distribution systems require special consideration so that equipment may be operated within its rating. The cost and operational acceptability of the following should be carefully considered:

1. Use load-center distribution systems with smaller transformers which limit the available short-circuit current.

2. Use a current-limiting busway, reactors, or higher-impedance transformers to reduce the available short-circuit current.

3. Use current-limiting fuses, current-limiting breakers, or breakers with limiters, in all combination starters and feeders in the control centers.

lower in magnitude than the available short-circuit current and must be assumed not to be self-extinguishing. Even low-level arching faults are capable of releasing tremendous energy at the point of fault and can be highly destructive.

A NON-AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER (MOLDED CASE

SWITCH) OR A NON-FUSED SWITCH MUST BE PROPERLY

COORDINATED WITH UP STREAM PROTECTIVE DEVICES.

For full protection against all levels of arcing faults on grounded systems, a ground-fault relay is recommended. The ground-fault system is a protective means that responds to phase-to-ground current, but is not affected by phase-to-phase current. It is used to protect motor control centers from extensive damage, which can be caused by phase-to-ground arcing faults.

Fuses are single-pole interrupters. An arcing fault may not necessarily be cleared by a single-pole interruption, as the fault can be back-fed from the other energized phases. This reduces the fault current, increasing the blowing time of the energized fuses.

Because of this delay, severe equipment damage may occur.

Single-phasing is eliminated with fast-acting three-pole fused interrupter switches which open when a single fuse blows.

An electrically operated HPC switch with single-phase detector will meet the three-phase disconnection (single-phase protection) recommendations for a main protective device.

When switches without a three-phase trip are used, a GSR ground-fault protection scheme is particularly recommended since damaging arcing faults almost always involve ground. It should operate the trip device on the closest line-side three-phase disconnect.

MAIN HORIZONTAL BUS AND VERTICAL

BUS EXTENSIONS

The standard bus short-circuit withstand rating is 42,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Also available optionally are ratings of

50,000, 65,000 and 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes. The bus rating must equal or exceed the available short-circuit current.

Refer to Structure (Section B) for ratings.

COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROL UNITS

The short-circuit rating of a combination controller is based on tests with rated short-circuit current available at the line terminal of the control center and at rated voltage.

The short-circuit rating must equal or exceed the available short-circuit current. Refer to Starters (Section D) for ratings.

MAIN PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A motor control center requires adequate overcurrent and shortcircuit protection. This is the function of the main protective device.

It may be located in or remote from the control center. Wherever located, it must have an interrupting rating equal to greater than the available short-circuit current at the point of its connection to the system. If located at the control center, this value would be the system available short-circuit current, Is (Fig. 1).

A motor control center should be protected for all types of faults from low-level arcing ground faults to bolted three-phase faults which can develop the full available short-circuit current. Line-toline and line-to-ground arcing faults (often produced by contaminated atmospheres, foreign materials, etc.) can be appreciably

FEEDER TAP UNITS

All feeder tap units must have a short-circuit rating which equals or exceeds the available short-circuit current. Refer to Feeders

(Section C) for ratings.

A-10



FUSE CLASSIFICATION

UL classifications are the most definitive method of determining fuse charactertistics, and are used in this publication. Use UL fuse

“Class” when specifying type of fuse.

UL classifications used in motor control centers are:

A. Class H—defines dimensions for 600 amperes maximum,

250 volts or 600 volts, with non-reject type mounting. Fuse characteristics may vary.

B. Class K—have Class H mounting dimensions and limit peak let-through currents, though not classified as

“Current Limiting.” Class K fuses are sub-divided into

Classes K-1, K-5 and K-9, depending on peak let-through current, with K-1 having the lowest peak let-through currents. K-9 fuses are not recommended because their peak let-through currents are too great to be considered safe for controllers. Class K fuses are rated 600 amperes maximum, 250 volts or 600 volts.

C. Class R—current-limiting type fuses with reject mounting features. Class R fuses are sub-divided into Classes RK-1 and RK-5, depending on maximum peak let-through currents. RK fuses are rated 600 amperes maximum and 250 volts or 600 volts.

FUSE CLASSIFICATIONS

D. Class J — are more current limiting than RKs and due to their unique dimensions have an inherent rejection feature. Ratings are 600 amperes maximum, 600 volts.

E. Class L — are current limiting and due to their unique mounting dimensions have an inherent rejection feature.

Ratings are 601 amperes minimum, 600 volts.

Fuses marked with “D,” “Time-Delay,” “Dual-Element” or similar designations are time-delay type fuses and will generally carry 500 percent rated amperes for 10 seconds, thus allowing a smaller rated fuse to be used in most starter applications.

UL listed combination motor starter units furnished with nonrejection Class H, K-1 or K-5 fuses are short-circuit rated 5kA for

NEMA size 1, 2 and 3 starters, and 10kA for larger starters. Higher short-circuit ratings require rejection type fuses. See Fuse

Classifications table below for short-circuit ratings.

Fuses that are mechanically interchangeable may not be electrically equivalent. Refer to the fuse manufacturer for interrupting rating and current-limiting characteristics.

Ampere Range

Voltage Ratings

Characteristic➀

Interrupting

Rating RMS

Symmetrical Amperes

Current-Limiting

Rejection Type

➀ Check fuse manufacturers for specific fuse characteristics

Class J Class R

0-600 0-600

600 250

600

200K 200K

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL Standard

Class L Class H Class K-1, K-5

601-6000

600

200K

Yes

Yes

0-600

250

600

10K

No

No

0-600

250

600

50K

100K

200K

No

No

A

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

The standard 8000-Line motor control center is designed for operation in a clean, indoor environment having a 40°C maximum ambient temperature.

The nominal minimum temperature for storage is -40°C and for operation, -20°C. Motor control center space heaters are recommended whenever temperature conditions below 0°C will exist.

Where extreme cold temperatures are to be encountered for long periods of time. It is recommended that the motor control center be installed in heated rooms or enclosures.

For ambient temperatures above 40°C, special consideration must be given to the need for ventilation, ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays, special wire insulation, and oversized control transformers. Ambient compensated overloads provide essentially constant trip setting as the control ambient varies.

For indoor environments subject to falling liquids, NEMA 2 dripproof enclosures are recommended. If water spray and splashing are to be encountered, NEMA 2 construction should also be used.

Space heaters may be desirable to prevent condensation on internal parts.

For outdoor installations, NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosures are required. These can be non-walk-in, walk-in, non-walk-in back-toback, and walk-through with common aisle. Thermostatically controlled space heaters and ambient-compensated breakers and overload relays should be considered for these applications.

Provisions for heating and cooling the entire outdoor enclosure are also available. Standard NEMA 3R construction is suitable for wind velocities up to 75 mph. Beyond this, up to 130 mph, specially reinforced enclosures are available. This special design is also necessary if the NEMA 3R enclosure has to withstand seismic conditions, including seismic Zone 4 applications.

A modification of the 20- and 22-inch deep 8000-Line motor control center is available for earthquake conditions. It can satisfactorily withstand a force of 5 g’s, 1 to 100 Hz, input at its floor sills simultaneously in all three orthogonal axes, and is suitable for

Seismic Zone 4 installation.

For dusty atmospheres, semi-dust-tight NEMA 1 gasketed or

NEMA 12 construction are recommended.

The altitude limit for the standard electro-mechanical motor control center design is 6000 feet. Applications above this should be referred to the Company for recommendations. Some solid-state components are only rated to 3300 feet and may reduce the altitude limit of the motor control center.

Fungus-Proofing of organic materials in a motor control center can be provided. It should be noted that the best available treatment has a very limited effective life of only a few months. Keeping equipment dry and above the dew-point is a much better way of avoiding fungus-growth, and the use of space heaters is recommended for this purpose. Heaters should be energized if the motor control center is to be stored for any length of time. Where export crating is involved, terminals for connection of an external source of space heater power can be provided on the outside of the crate.

A-11

GE 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers Structure

B

B-1



ENCLOSURE TYPES

TYPE 1–General Purpose, Indoor

Intended for use indoors, primarily to prevent accidental contact of personnel with the enclosed equipment, in areas where unusual service conditions do not exist. In addition, they provide protection against falling dirt.

TYPE 1 GASKETED–Semi Dust-tight,

Indoor

Intended to restrict the entrance of dust and dirt into Type 1 enclosures, but are not dust-tight. Standard is closed-cell gasketing material.

TYPE 2–Drip-proof, Indoor

Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against falling noncorrosive liquids and falling dirt. These enclosures have provision for drainage. Dripshields on top of the motor control center and neoprene closed–cell gasketing afford protection from falling and splashing liquids. They are not water-tight.

TYPE 3R–Rain-proof, Outdoor

Intended for use outdoors to protect the enclosed equipment against rain. They are not dust-proof, snow-proof nor sleet-proof

(ice-proof).

TYPE 12–Industrial Use–Dust-tight and

Drip-tight, Indoor

Intended for use indoors to protect the enclosed equipment against fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt, and light splashing, seepage, dripping, and external condensation of noncorrosive liquids.

INDOOR ENCLOSURES

GE motor control centers are made up of standardized vertical sections housing vertical and horizontal bus, wiring channels and compartmented control units. Sections may be bolted together to form a single panel assembly powered by line connection at a single point. Normal shipping split is three sections maximum.

STANDARD NEMA 1 or NEMA 1 (GASKETED)

ENCLOSURES

Standard finish is light-gray ANSI 61 over a phosphate rust inhibitor. All unpainted parts are zinc-chromate electroplated.

20- and 22-inch deep enclosures are furnished with hinged doors on the rear, while the 13-inch deep enclosures are supplied with bolt-on rear covers. Pan-type doors utilize quarter-turn fasteners.

Gasketed doors, cover plates, and operating handles are available as an option. Two heavy-duty 3-inch-by-1

1

/

2

-inch,12-gauge floor sills and 3-inch full-length lifting beam are included. Open bottom is standard.

NEMA 2 DRIP-PROOF CONSTRUCTION

Similar to NEMA 12 gasketed construction except with pan-type dripshield on top and with open bottom. Dripshield extends four inches beyond front of motor control center. Standard finish: light gray ANSI 61. Furnished with removable conduit cover plates unless otherwise specified.

NEMA 12

Similar to NEMA 1 gasketed construction except that bottom plates are furnished and all removable plates are gasketed.

HOW TO DEFINE UNUSED SPACES

Future Unit Space–

Unit space specified and equipped to accept a future unit.

Blank Unit Space–

Unit space not equipped to accept a future unit.

Unuseable Unit Space–

Unit space not suitable to accept accept a future unit.

B-2




Structure

B

Front view Side view

13-inch-deep section

(1200 amp max.)

Side view

20- or 22-inch-deep section

(Front mounted only)

(20” - 1600 amp max.)

(22” - 2000/2500 amp only)

Side view

20- or 22-inch-deep section

(Back-to-Back)

(20” - 1200 amp max.)

(22” - 2000/2500 amp only)

Enclosure Height

Horizontal Bus

Top Wireway

Bottom wireway

No S.U.’s➁

6”➀

12” ¿

6

2” Bus

12”

6”

6

Notes:

• One S.U. = 12-inch vertical height.

12”

12”

5

1

/

2

90”

12”➀

6”

6

4” Bus

12”➀

12” ¿

5

1

/

2

18”

6”

5

1

/

2

• Average weight per vertical section including units–500 lbs.

6”➀

12” ¿

5

2” Bus

12”

6”

5

12”

12”

4

1

/

2

78”

12”➀

6”

5

4” Bus

12”➀

12” ¿

4

1

/

2

18”

6”

4

1

/

2

➀ A 1

/

2

S.U. unit cannot be mounted immediately below a 6inch top wireway with 2-inch bus, or immediately below a

12-inch wireway with 4-inch bus.

➁ On back-to-back sections, the rear side must always have a

12-inch top wireway with 2-inch bus and an 18-inch top wireway with 4-inch bus.

B-3




13” DEEP SECTION

END VIEW STANDARD 13” DEEP TOP CONDUIT ENTRANCE

DETAILS FOR STD. 13”

Structure

13” (330.2mm) DEEP

BOTTOM CONDUIT ENTRANCE

DETAILS FOR STD. 13”

REF.

DIM.

A” =

B” =

C” =

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

20” WIDE

ENCLOSURE

24” WIDE 30” WIDE

ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE

20”

508.0mm

24”

609.6mm

30”

762.0mm

17.63”

447.8mm

4.63”

117.6mm

21.63”

549.4mm

8.63”

219.4mm

27.63”

701.8mm

NOT

APPLICABLE


DETAILS WHEN AUTO—TRANSFORMER

IS FURNISHED

BUS DETAILS STANDARD 13” DEEP

13” (330.2mm) DEEP

END VIEW WITH 2” (50.8mm) BUS

BAR

13” (330.2mm) DEEP

END VIEW WITH 4” (101.6mm) BUS BAR

NEMA II DRIP SHIELD

STANDARD GROUND AND NEUTRAL BUS DETAILS

B-4

VERTICAL WIRING TROUGHS

Ground bus bolted directly to section frame

Insulated neutral bus

Standard location of ground and neutral bus with a

12-in. (304.8 mm) compartment at the bottom of

MCC

Standard location of ground and neutral bus with a

6-in. (152.4 mm) compartment at the bottom of

MCC




Structure

B

B-5





Structure

B-6




TOP CONDUIT ENTRANCE DETAILS

END VIEW STANDARD 30” DEEP

Structure


B

BUS DETAILS STANDARD 30” DEEP

30” (762.0mm) DEEP

REF.

DIM.

A” =

B” =

C” =

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

20” WIDE 24” WIDE 30” WIDE

ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE ENCLOSURE

20”

508.0mm

24”

609.6mm

30”

762.0mm

17.63”

447.8mm

4.63”

117.6mm

21.63”

549.4mm

8.63”

219.4mm

27.63”

701.8mm

NOT

APPLICABLE

END VIEW WITH 2” (50.8mm) BUS BAR

END VIEW WITH 4” (101.6mm)

BUS BAR

END VIEW

NEMA II DRIP SHIELD

STANDARD GROUND AND NEUTRAL BUS DETAILS

TOP VIEW

B-7




Type C Master Terminal Boards Disconnect Handle Projection

Structure

Used For L- and U- Shaped Motor Control Center Arrangements

MCC Depth

13

20

22

Dimensions (In Inches)

A

17

24

26

B

20

24

24

MCC

Front

A

Corner section

(no units)

B

Front MCC

B-8



OPTIONS

Space Heaters

Space heaters are used to prevent moisture condensation on the inside of the motor control center. One heater (62.5 watts at

120 volts AC) is installed in the bottom of each vertical section.

UL requires space heaters be controlled by a thermostat. One thermostat can control up to 14 heaters and is located in the top horizontal wireway.

A terminal board for connecting an external 120-volt power source is standard. The terminal board is located in the top horizontal wireway adjacent to the thermostat(s). This is recommended since it permits the space heaters to be energized and effective even when the motor control center itself is deenergized. If export crating is involved, the space heater circuit can be wired to an external plug for energizing the heaters during shipment and storage.

When specified, space heater power can be provided from within the motor control center. Include the required distribution transformer with primary and secondary protection in the motor control center.

An enclosed foreign voltage disconnect switch is available as an option.

Extended Height Pull Box (Top Hat)

A pull box can be mounted on top of a vertical section when specified. The standard height is 12 inches; 6-, 18-, and 24-inch heights are also available. Top, front, and end covers are removable for access.

Rodent Barriers

Metal plates bolted to the bottom of each end section to close the opening between the front and rear floor sills. Not required if the floor sills will be removed or imbedded in concrete.

Structural Floor Sills

1

1

/

2

-inch X 3-inch structural channels are furnished in place of standard formed channels.

Extra Width Vertical Wireway

24-inch wide sections can be furnished with 8-inch wide vertical wireway and door.

Motor Control Center Construction

Bottom Plates

Plates bolt on to the bottom of each motor control center section. They may be removed to facilitate installing conduit.

Starters Mounted Back-to-Back (Single Section)

This construction requires a minimum 20-inch deep enclosure. A common main horizontal bus is furnished with individual front and rear vertical buses to maintain same phase sequence, front and rear. This allows for mounting draw-out units in the rear of the section without changing phasing.

The back-to-back section is UL labelled per table below and can be mounted in a NEMA 3R non-walk-in outdoor enclosure.

Care must be exercised when arranging units as some of the larger starters, power transformers, etc., require the full enclosure depth.

Indoor enclosure, exploded view

Back-to-Back Availability

Main Bus Amps

600

800

1000

1200

1600

2000

2500

42/50K AIC

UL

UL

UL

UL

N/A

UL

UL

Back-To-Back Line Ups

65K AIC

UL

UL

UL

UL

N/A

UL

UL

100K AIC

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

13-inch through 22-inch motor control center equipments may be mounted back-to-back provided back access is not required.

Refer to the factory, noting specific requirements. This arrangement may require a main bus transition assembly.

Major Structural Components

Side Sheets, L-H & R-H

Vertical Bus Mounting Channels

Case Sills, Front/Rear, Top/Bottom

Top Horizontal Channel

Lifting Channel (Top)

Floor Sills, Front/Rear

Enclosing Covers/Panels

Rear Doors, 45” (2 per section)

Endplates, Top/Bottom Wireways

Top Conduit Covers

Bottomplates

Vertical Wiretrough Door

Other Steel

Unit Barrier Shelves ......................................0.060”

Unit Cover Doors 6”, 12”, 18” .......................0.060”

Unit Cover Doors 24” & Larger .....................0.090”

Unit Saddles 6” & 12” ...................................0.060”

Unit Saddles 24” & Larger ............................0.075”

0.090”

(13 Gauge)

0.250”

0.105”

0.060”

B

B-9



ENCLOSURES

Seismic Bracing

Floor plan of each vertical section showing conduit entrance limitations for motor control center vertical sections with seismic bracing.

See standard indoor enclosures for other construction details.

Section Floor Plan for Seismic Bracing for NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R Construction

Note that bolt down locations for sections with seismic bracing change from center of structure (left to right), to four corners with .635 clearance holes for

1

/

2

-inch bolts.

Mounting Requirements for Seismic

NEMA 3R with Optional Heavy Base

A

B

Case Width

20” (508mm) W

24” (609.6 mm) W

30” (762 mm) W

“A”

13.88” (352.5 mm)

17.88” (454.2 mm)

23.88” (606.6 mm)

20” DP

“B” (Depth)

22” DP

13.75”

(349.2)

15.75”

(398.5)

Center of Gravity

For a uniformly loaded 90” high x 20” deep lineup, center of gravity is:

X = center of lineup

Y = 46

1

/

2

” above bottom of floor sill

Z = 8” in from front (front-mounted devices 20” deep)

OR: 10” in from front (back-to-back construction)

Z = 5” in from front (13” deep)

Z = 8

1

/

2

” in from front (22” deep)

Z = 11” in from front (25” NEMA 3R)

Typical variations due to uneven loads:

X = ± 5”

Y = ± 1”

Z = ± .5”

B-10



OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES

NEMA 3R NON-WALK-IN ENCLOSURE

(STANDARD)

The standard NEMA 3R enclosure consists of a specially constructed MCC section with a mating framework which supports the roof and extended front. The basic design is similar to switchboard construction. The smaller footprint will permit a broader usage than the optional NEMA 3R construction. Meets Seismic Zone 4 (optional). ➃

Module Width

(Total)

25

30

35

45

50

55

55

60

65

2.5

3.0

2.5

3.5

A

2.5

3.0

2.5

3.0

2.5

MCC Split Length

(S1 & S2)

➁

20”

24”

30”

40”

44”

50”

48”

54”

60”

NOTES:

➀

Doors shown are double doors, or MW

➁ less than 45” door will be single door.

NEMA 3R module may contain 1, 2 or 3

➂

➃

MCC sections, 3 section shipping split limited to (3) 20” wide MCC sections only.

All dimensions in inches.

For Seismic mounting see Sh # B-10

MODULE WIDTH MODULE WIDTH

20” DEEP MCC FLOOR PLAN

25.00

FOR CONDUIT OPENING

AND BOLT DOWN HOLE DIM.

SEE SH #B-5

MODULE WIDTH

MODULE

22” DEEP MCC FLOOR PLAN

30.00

FOR CONDUIT OPENING


SEE SH #B-6

MODULE

MODULE WIDTH

30

22

35.00

30/22” DEEP MCC FLOOR PLAN

FOR CONDUIT OPENING


SEE SH #B-6, 7

(D)

(B)

(C)

MCC

Depth

(C)

20”

22”

30” Plus

22”

Front

Extension

(B)

5

8

5

13

Top

Cover

(D)

35

40

45

Structure

B-11

B



OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES

NEMA 3R WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE (OPTIONAL)

General Electric’s outdoor construction consists of an indoor

(20-inch deep only) motor control center line-up in an outdoor enclosure. Standard NEMA 3R enclosures generally house two or more vertical sections and are bolt-together type construction with provision for future expansion. Standard construction will withstand wind velocities up to 75 mph. Roof loading should be limited to 30 lbs./ft

2

. Exterior finish is an air-dry alkyd enamel

ANSI 61 (light gray) over a phosphate corrosion-resistant primer.

Outdoor enclosures are approximately 104 inches overall height.

Floor plates beneath the interior motor control center line-up are not provided. If required, order motor control center bottom plates with the motor control center sections. Space heaters with thermostatic control are recommended in the motor control center line-up. Refer to specific job drawings for mounting and anchoring details.

NEMA 3R outdoor enclosures are available in four enclosure types:

• NEMA 3R non-walk-in (back-to-back)

• NEMA 3R walk-in

• NEMA 3R common-aisle, walk-through

Each NEMA 3R module may vary in width from 20 inches to

48 inches, and modules of varying width may be bolted together to form a single shipping section. With the standard base a maximum of two modules can be shipped bolted together. Specify a heavy base under the following conditions:

• If more than two NEMA 3R modules form a single shipping section.

• Rear access to the motor control center is specified.

• Wall insulation is specified.

• Extended height is specified.

• Wind withstandability above 75 mph (130 mph max.)

• Seismic withstandability is specified (Zone 4, 2.25g max.).

• NEMA 3R walk-through construction is required.

• NEMA 3R non-walk-in

OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE FEATURES

Feature

Rear Access

Louvered Door Ventilation

Filters For Door Ventilation

Top or End Ventilation

Filters for Top or End Ventilation

Insulation–Top & Sides

Insulation–Top Only

Fluorescent Lighting, Switches and Convenience Outlets

130 mph Wind Withstandability

Seismic Withstandability (2.25G Max)

Extended Height (10”)

Door Stops

Panic Door Hardware

Removable Floor Plates in Front of MCC

Key Lockable Doors (cylinder lock)

Heating and Cooling

Heavy Base

STANDARD

3R Non-Walk-In 3R Non-Walk-In

Standard

–

–

Standard

–

–

–

Optional

Optional

Optional

–

Standard

–

–

Padlock Prov.

–

Optional

Standard

Optional

–

–

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Standard

–

Standard

Standard

Optional

Optional

OPTIONAL

3R Non-Walk-In

Back-To-Back

3R Walk-In

–

Standard

Optional

–

–

Optional

Optional

–

Optional

Optional

Optional

Standard

–

Standard

Standard

Optional

Optional

Optional

Standard

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Standard

–

Standard

Standard

Optional

Optional

3R Walk Through

Optional

–

–

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

Optional

–

Standard

Standard

Standard

Optional

Standard

B-12



OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS

Optional NEMA 3R Outdoor Non-Walk-In

Structure

B

Optional NEMA 3R Outdoor Non-Walk-In

(Back-to-Back)

GENERAL NOTES:

• NEMA 3R bolt-down hole size and location is subject to change depending on equipment requirements. See specific job drawings.

• Average shipping weight of all outdoor enclosures is based on 50 lbs. per square foot of floor space plus the weight of the interior motor control center line-ups.

• Some local codes require 30-inch minimum door width.

B-13



OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS

Optional NEMA 3R Outdoor Walk-In

Structure

Optional NEMA 3R Outdoor Common-Aisle

Walk Through

B-14



BUS SELECTION

All continuous–current rating selections or recommendations are based on the motor control center being located in a maximum 40° C (104°F) ambient. Refer to General (Section A) for other environmental considerations.

MAIN HORIZONTAL BUS

The size of motor control center main bus and cables feeding the main bus is based on the current-carrying capacity required for motors plus other connected loads.

The capacity required for motors can be taken as 125 percent of the full-load rating of the largest motor plus 100 percent of the full-load rating of all other motors to be operated at the same time. Modified requirements resulting from duty-cycle or demand factor can be taken into account.

The current-carrying capacity required for other connected loads should be computed on the basis of 100 percent of the sum of individual loads except where a demand factor can properly be applied to reduce this total. Consideration should be given to future requirements.

VERTICAL BUS EXTENSIONS

The maximum vertical bus loading is calculated as follows: 80 percent of the feeder trip or fuse clip rating, plus 100 percent of the starter full load amps, plus 25 percent of the largest motor full load amps. This total cannot exceed the vertical bus rating.

Tin plated copper verticval bus is standard, with silver plating as an option.

NEUTRAL BUS

Neutral bus is normally rated 50 percent or 100 percent of the main bus ampacity depending on system requirements.

GROUND BUS

UL requires a ground bus in multisection motor control centers. 300 ampere Cu or 375 ampere Al ground bus will meet minimum size requirements for main busses rated through 2000 amperes. A clearance hole for

3

/

8

-inch hardware is provided in each section.

OPTIONS

The following UL listed options are available:

• Cap plugs for unused vertical bus stab openings.

• Shutter mechanism for vertical bus stab openings.

• Fully-insulated main horizontal bus.

• Silver plated horizontal and vertical bus.

• Plated ground bus (tin/silver).

B

BUS SYSTEMS/SELECTION

MCC Bus

Main Horizontal

Vertical

Neutral

Horizontal Ground

Vertical Grounds

Continuous Current

Rating Amperes

300

375

600

800

1000

1200

1250

300

375

600

600

150

600

800

1000

1200

1600

➄➆

2000

➅

2500

➅

300

450

600

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Cu

X

X

Material

Alum ➇

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Short-Circuit Rating in RMS Symmetrical Amperes–(kA)

42

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

65 ➈

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

100 ➁

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

➀

4-inch bus requires top 18-inch motor control center bus compartment.

➁

Not available in back-to-back construction (requires 4" main bus with 600 A vertical bus)

➂

Required for all bolt-in assemblies.

➃

Can be UL rated at 1200 amperes in a 20” deep section.

➄

Back to back 20” deep not available.

➅

2000 and 2500 amp main bus require 22” deep section.

➆

1600 amp main bus requires a 20” deep section.

➇

Copper bus is standard in Spectra MCC construction.

➈

Standard bracing in Spectra MCC construction, 42K for back-to-back construction.

UL

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

– 2” Bus

¬ 2” Bus

➃

2” Bus

➀

4” Bus

➀

4” Bus

➀

4” Bus

➀

4” Bus

➂

1

/

4

” x 1”

1

/

4

” x 2”

1

/

4

” X 2”

3

/

8

” X 2”

1

/

8

” x 1”

B-15

GE 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers Mains, Feeders, Incoming Lines

C

C-1


Motor Control Centers Mains, Incoming Lines

MAINS

GENERAL

Main units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Sizes by ampere rating, short-circuit rating, type construction, and space units required are given in the accompanying lists.

Normally, thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fuses are necessary for main protection. The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a main unit for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.

For reverse–fed circuit breakers, refer to factory for details.

Refer to specific breaker publications for time-current characteristics and programmable options for the various types of circuit breakers. A list of these publications is given in Application Data

(Section J).

SERVICE ENTRANCE

UL Listed main units containing only circuit breakers or fused switches may be UL classified as suitable for service entrance. If a single disconnect is furnished as a disconnect for all load circuits the unit will be marked “Main.”

In order for the units to be classified as suitable for service entrance, the incoming phase conductors must connect directly to the disconnect device line terminals or to a UL listed main line terminal assembly.

A grounding electrode conductor terminal connector sized in accordance with the circuit ampacity is furnished in one section.

Three-phase, four-wire systems include a neutral bonding jumper for grounding the neutral conductor during installation. Ground fault protection is required for disconnects 1000A and above for solidly grounded wye services, where phase-to-ground is more than 150 volts (NEC 230-95).

Refer to the factory when ground fault protection or metering is required.

MAIN METERING/LUGS

Line side CTs can be provided in the main compartment for use with a metering unit. This option will add space.

If crimp type lugs are required, a bus assembly is fabricated to provide a landing pad for these terminals. This extends the space required for the main and must be factory installed.

FUSED SWITCH MAINS

Interrupting Rating

RMS Amps

(In thousands )➂

Construction

Amperes

Volts StabBolt-

In In 240 480 600

FUSIBLE SWITCHES

100

➄

200 ƒ

400 ƒ

600 ƒ

65

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

N/A

100

100

100

HIGH PRESSURE CONTACT SWITCH

800

1200

1600

2000

2500

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

➃

6

6

6

6

6

1 1 /

2

2 1 /

2

3 1 /

2

3 1 /

2

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➁➉

➁➉

➀ Requires a 24-inch wide by 20-inch deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required; rear is not available for back-to-back construction.

➁ Requires additional 1 /

2

X of mounting space when located at top of section adjacent to 6-inch wireway cover with 2-inch horizontal bus.

➂ With Class J, R and L fuses.

➃ Top/bottom entry.

➄ For 600 volt applications or 100k ratings, provide a 200 amp switch with 100A clips. 100A switch can be rated at 100kA with Class J fuses only.

➆ Requires 30-inch wide by 20-inch deep section full depth.

➇ Requires 30-inch wide by 30-inch deep section. Rating based on

NEMA 1 enclosure only.

➈ Requires 30-inch wide by 30-inch deep section. Must be NEMA 1

Construction, 80% rated only.

➉ Requires 24-inch wide section if bottom fed incoming line.

➀

➀

➆

➇

➈

C-2


Motor Control Centers Mains, Incoming Lines

CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINS–Standard Selection

Amperes

CB

Type

240V

IC (kA)

480V

SPECTRA THERMAL MAGNETIC

150

225

600

1200

1200

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

SKL

SKL

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

600V

25/25

25/25

65/65

42

42

Stab-

In

X

X

Bolt-

In

X

X

X

Space

Units

1 1 /

2

2

2

2

6

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀

➀➁➆

➁➅

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

T/B

T/B

T

B

POWERBREAK ® INSULATED-CASE MICROVERSATRIP

800

1600

2000

2500

TP/THP/SSF

TP/THP/SSF

TP/THP/SSF

TP/THP/SSF

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

42

42/65

42/65

42/65

800

1600

2000

TC/THC/SSD

TC/THC/SSD

TC/THC/SSD

65

65

65

65

65

65

CONVENTIONAL, THERMAL MAGNETIC

150

225

THED

THFK

30

30

25

25

42

42

42

18

18

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

6 (24W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

6 (30W)

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

➂

➃➉

➇➉

➇ ➉

➈➇

➈➇

➈➇

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

X

X

T/B

T/B

OTHER CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINS

IC (kA)

Amperes

CB

Type

240V

480V 600V

Stab-

In

Bolt-

In

TRI-BREAK

®

INTEGRALLY FUSED, THERMAL MAGNETIC

400

600

800

TB4

TB6

TB8

–

–

–

–

–

–

100

100

100

X

X

X

LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER–AKR MICROVERSATRIP

800

800

1600

1600

2000

AKR-30S

AKR-30H

AKR-50

AKR-50H

AKRT-50H

22

42

50

65

65

22

42

50

65

65

22

42

42

42

42

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

2 1 /

2

2 1 /

2

2 1 /

2

6

6

6

6

6

800

800

1600

1600

2000

AKR70-30S

AKR70-30H

AKR70-50

AKR70-50H

AKR70-50H

22

42

50

65

65

22

42

50

65

65

22

42

42

42

42

➀ Main breaker requires additional 1

/

2

X of mounting space when located at top of section adjacent to 6-inch wireway cover with 2-inch horizontal bus or 12-inch wireway cover with 4-inch horizontal bus.

➁ When a size 6 or 7 starter is in the motor control center lineup, use a 1200 ampere MicroVersa Trip circuit breaker as a main.

➂ Requires special section 90-inch high, 24-inch wide, 20-inch deep

➃ Requires special section 90-inch high, 30-inch wide, 20 inch deep.

➄ Requires special section 90-inch high, 30-inch wide, 40-inch deep.

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

Notes

➀➆

➀➆

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

T

T

–

–

–

–

–

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

X

X

X

X

X

6

6

6

6

6

–

–

–

–

–

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

➈➄

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

➅ Requires full 20” depth of enclosure; rear is not available for back-to-back construction.

➆ Main breaker must be mounted at top of the section and requires full 20” depth of enclosure; rear is not available for back-to-back construction.

➇ Requires special section 90-inch high, 30-inch wide, 30-inch deep.

➈ For UL or service entrance labels provide main breaker in switchboard construction.

➉ NEMA 12; 80% Rating

NEMA 1, 80% Rated Only

1 1 /

2

X units are available at 180 Amps Max. Load.

In 8000-Line MCC only.

Data subject to change without notice

C

C-3



FEEDERS

Feeder units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or a circuit breaker. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are required unless the feeder supplies a critical circuit, such as a fire pump controller.

Select the fuse or circuit breaker trip rating based on the feeder circuit continuous current rating in accordance with the NEC.

Feeder unit short-circuit interruption ratings must equal or exceed the available short-circuit currents.

Note that magnetic only circuit breakers are not approved for use as feeder units.

FUSED SWITCH FEEDERS

Interrupting Rating

RMS Amps

(In thousands)

➂

Construction

Amperes

Volts StabBolt-

In 240

FUSIBLE SWITCHES

30

60

30

60

100➈

100➆

200

400

600

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100

480

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100

600

100

100

100

100

–

100

100

100

100

In

THPR HIGH PRESSURE CONTACT SWITCH

800

1200

1600

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Space

Units

➅

6

6

6

1

2

1

1

4

4

1 /

2

1 /

2

1

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

➀➁➃

➀➁➃

➁

➁

➁

X

X

–

➂

➂➇

➂➇

Note:

• Dual or twin feeder units are not available.

➀

1

/

2 space unit feeders with “J” type fuses can be UL labeled. All other type fuses cannot be labeled.

➁ Feeder unit requires additional

1

/

2

X of mounting space when located at top of section adjacent to 6-inch wireway cover with 2-inch horizontal bus or 12-inch wireway cover with 4-inch horizontal bus.

➂ Requires a 24-inch wide by 20-inch deep section. Full depth of enclosure is required; fear is not available for back-to-back construction.

➃ When feeder unit requires accessories, the unit height must be minimum of 1 space.

➄ With Class J, R, L fuses.

➅ Top/bottom entry.

➆ Class J fuses only.

➇ See note #6, sheet C-5.

➈ For 600 Volt applications or 100K ratings, provide a 200 amp switch with 100A clips.

C-4


Motor Control Centers Feeders

CIRCUIT BREAKER FEEDERS–Standard Selection

Amperes

CB

Type

240V

IC (kA)

480V

SPECTRA THERMAL MAGNETIC

100

150

225

600

1200

1200

SEL/SEP

SEL/SEP

SFL/SFP

SGL/SGP

SKL

SKL

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

65/100

65/100

65/100

65/100

65

65

CONVENTIONAL, THERMAL MAGNETIC

100

150

225

THED

THED

THFK

30

30

30

25

25

25

600V

25/25

25/25

25/25

65/65

42

42

18

18

18

Stab-

In

X

X

X

X

X

X

Bolt-

In

X

X

X

OTHER CIRCUIT BREAKER FEEDERS

Amperes

CB

Type

240V

ICV (kA)

480V 600V

Stab-

In

LIMITER ASSISTED, THERMAL MAGNETIC

100 THEDL – – 100 X

TRI-BREAK ® INTEGRALLY FUSED, THERMAL MAGNETIC

400

600

800

TB4

TB6

TB8

–

–

–

–

–

–

100

100

100

Bolt-

In

X

X

X

Space

Units

1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

6

2

2

1

/

2

1

1

Space

Units

1 /

2

UL (X)

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL (X)

Listed

X

Notes

➀➂

➆

➀

➁ ➅

➃ ➅

➀➂

➇

Notes

➀➂

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

T/B

T/B

T/B

T

B

T/B

T/B

T/B

Entry

Top/Bot

T/B

2

1

/

2

4

6

X

X

X

➀

➄

➁➃

T/B

T/B

T/B

➀ Feeder breaker requires additional 1

/

2

X of mounting space when located at the top of section adjacent to 6-inch wireway cover with 2-inch horizontal bus or 12-inch wireway cover with 4-inch horizontal bus.

➁ Must be located at the top of section adjacent to 12-inch wireway cover (minimum) with 2-inch horizontal bus or 18inch wireway cover with 4-inch horizontal bus.

➂ When feeder unit accessories are required such as shunt trip,

AUX switch, UV release, etc., unit height must be a minimum of 1 space.

➃ Requires full depth of enclosure; rear is not available for back-to-back construction (20” deep minimum).

➄ Feeder breaker must be mounted at the bottom of the section and requires full depth of enclosure; rear is not available for back-to-back construction.

➅ Feeder units 1000A and over should have ground fault sensing on three-phase, four-wire systems where line to ground voltage is more than 150V

➆ 1

1 /

2

X units are available at 180 Amp. Max. load.

➇ 8000-Line only.

C

C-5



OPTIONS FOR MAINS

AND FEEDERS

ACCESSORIES FOR MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Breaker Type

THED

THFK➀

TJK, THJK,

TB4

TB6, TB8

L

UL

Bell Alarm

Switch

Mounting Pole

➅

C

UL

UL

R

UL

UL

Auxiliary Switch or Shunt Strip

Mounting Pole

➅

L

UL➁

R

UL

➁

➂

UL➁ UL

➁

➃

UL➁ UL

➁

➃

UL➁ UL

➁

➃

Undervoltage

Release

Mounting Pole

➅

L R

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Three Coil

Shunt Trip

Mounting Pole

➅

L R

UL

UL

Total Number of Accessories

Within Any One Circuit-Breaker

Any two Except UVR and 3-Coil,

Shunt Trip

Any Two

Any Two Plus Bell Alarm

Any Two Plus Bell Alarm

ACCESSORIES FOR SPECTRA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Breaker Type

All Spectra

Bell Alarm

Left Pole

Shunt Trip

➈ or Undervoltage Release

Left Pole

Aux. Switch

➇

Right Pole

Total # of Accessories

Aux. Switch & Bell Alarm Plus 1 other

ACCESSORIES FOR POWER BREAK

®

AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Breaker Type

TP, THP

TC, THC

All AKR-

800, 1600 and 2000 A.

Bell Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch

UL UL

➁

➄

UL UL➁

Shunt Trip

UL

UL

Undervoltage Release

UL

➀ UL Listed interrupting capacity with accessories as follows:

10K AIC at 600-volts AC, 22K AIC at 240-and 480-volts AC.

➁ 600 volts AC auxiliary switches are not UL listed.

➂ Maximum number of SPDT aux. switch elements is 2.

➃ Maximum number of SPDT aux. switch elements is 4.

➄ Maximum number of SPDT aux. switch elements is 10 when shunt trip is used, 12 without shunt trip.

UL

Blown Fuse Trip

UL

UL

Electrical Operator

UL

UL

➅ Pole positions: L=left; C=center; R=right

Total No. of Accessories

All➆

All

➆ UVR and blown fuse trip cannot be installed simultaneously.

➇ Aux. Switch available @ 240 V max only.

➈ Shunt trip requires aux. switch (G&K) or bell alarm (E&F) for continuous operation.

C-6



TERMINALS FOR FIELD WIRING MAINS

AND FEEDERS

Terminal Size

Will Accept Wire

➁

AWG/MCM

➀

Material

SWITCHES

30A QMW

60A QMW

100A QMW

200A QMW

400A QMR

600A QMR

14-8

14-2

12-2

14-1/0

12-1/0

6-250

2-600/

1/0-250

(2/Ph)

2-600

(2/Ph)

Cu-Al

Cu

Al

Cu

Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

HPC Switch

800-1600A 300-750

300-800

Cu

Al

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SE150 15-150A 1 lug

SF250 70-225A

SG600

125-600A

SK1200

300-1200A

1 lug

1 lug

2 lugs

3 lugs (800A)

3 lugs

4 lugs

12-3/0

8-350

6-600

2/0-400

3/0-500

300-750

250-500

THED 15-30A

THEDL (100A Max) 35-60A

70-110A

70-110A

125-150A

TFK/THFK 225A Feeder

225A Main

TJK/THJK 125-400A

250-600A

14-8

13-3

6-2/0

4-2/0

2-3/0

4-300

2-600/

1/0-250

(2/Ph)

6-600/

2/0-250

(2/Ph)

250-300

(2/Ph)

250-500

(2/Ph)

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu

Al

➀ Conductor #1 and smaller may be noted 60/75°C. Conductors #0 and larger must be rated 75°C.

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu

Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

➁ Conductor sizes based on 1/Ph unless otherwise indicated.

TERMINALS FOR FIELD WIRING MAINS

AND FEEDERS

Terminal Size

Will Accept Wire

➁

AWG/MCM

➀

Material

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TB4 125–400A Cu-Al

Cu-Al

TB6 3--–600A

TB8 600–800A

GROUND LUG

6-600

2/0-250

(2/Ph)

2/0-500

(2/Ph)

250–500

(3/Ph)

1/0-300

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

Cu-Al

C

C-7



OPTIONS FOR MAINS

AND FEEDERS

ACCESSORIES FOR FUSED SWITCHES

Switch Rating

30

60

100

200

400

600

1 NO

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Auxiliary Contacts

1 NC

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

2 NO

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

1 N0, 1 NC

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

UL

Note: Aux. contacts listed above are shown with fused switch in the open position.

ACCESSORIES FOR HIGH PRESSURE

CONTACT SWITCHES

• Integral ground fault with three-phase sensor adjustable pickup, adjustable time-delay, test function, mechanical ground fault indicator.

• Integral ground fault with three-phase sensor and relay only

(without test function, without indicator).

• Integrally mounted three-phase current sensor and 120 volt

AC electric trip only, for use with Ground Break ® relay and monitor panel.

• Blown fuse protection (480 volts max. )

• 1,2,3 or 4 SPDT auxiliary switches rate 6 amperes, 240 volts

AC.

KEY INTERLOCKING

Provisions for key interlocking can be provided on all circuit breaks and fusible switches. The standard key lock is by

Superior Lock Corporation. However, coordination with Kirk key locking will be supplied if necessary. The following information is required when lock coordination is to be provided with other upstream or down-stream devices remote from the motor control center:

PURCHASED BY ________________________________

ULTIMATE USER ________________________________

DESTINATION __________________________________

LOCK MANUFACTURER _________________________

LOCK NUMBER_________________________________

PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER ____________________

Note:

•

Minimum 12-inch high units are required for key interlocking. UL listed option.

GROUND FAULT PROTECTION

Two types of UL listed ground fault protection can be provided as an option with feeder and main circuit breakers. A shunt trip device is required in the circuit breaker to trip the breaker if a ground fault should occur. Type TGSR ground break protective relaying is recommended for main breaker application. Model

#252 ground fault relaying is recommended for most feeder applications. See Components (Section H) for description of both ground fault relay types. A minimum of 12-inch additional space height is required in addition to the standard space height shown for each main feeder unit.

A separate 120-volt source for the shunt trip circuit will decrease the additional space required.

INCOMING LINE TERMINATIONS

The following cable terminal compartments are commonly specified for use in motor control center construction where the main AC power disconnect is located upstream of the motor control center.

For other custom cable termination arrangements refer to

Company. The number of cables indicated must be installed to maintain the short-circuit rating.

Incoming Line Cable Assemblies

1. 600A Top Entry

2. 600A Bottom Entry

3. 800 or 1000A Top Entry ➅

4. 800 or 1000A Bottom Entry ➅

5 1200A Top or Bottom Entry

Consists of (2) 600-ampere terminal compartments in adjacent vertical sections.

An equal number of cables per phase Must be terminated in each section.

6. 1200A Top Entry (4” Bus)

7. 1200A Bottom Entry

8. 1200/1600A Top Entry

9. 1200/1600A Bottom Entry

10. 2000/2500 Top

11. 2000/2500A Bottom

–

18”

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Terminal Board Space

Adjacent Wireway

6”

12”

18”

12”

18”

–

18”

12”

18”

12”

6”

12”

6”

12”

12”

12”

6”

12”

18”

12”

36”➃

90”➃

90”➄

90”➄

Cables Per Ph➁

2

2 or 3

2

2 or 3

3

3

2

2

5

5

3

3

8

8

➀ Can be increased to 600 MCM when used with a 6-inch high pull box.

➁ Mechanical type Cu/Al lugs furnished for 75°C cable.

➂ Requires 20-inch deep section (no rear vertical bus).

Wire Size

2-400MCM➀

2-600 MCM

2-400 MCM

2-600 MCM

2-600 MCM

2-600 MCM

2-400 MCM➀

2-600 MCM

2-600 MCM

2-600 MCM

500-1000 MCM

500-1000 MCM

500-1000 MCM

500-1000 MCM

Fig. No.

2

2

3

1

1

4➂

1,2

1,2

5

4➂

6

6

7

7

UL Listed

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Short-Circuit Rating Max.

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

65K

100K

100K

100K

100K

➃ Requires 20” deep, 24” wide section.

➄ Requires 22” deep, 40” wide section.

➅ 1200A 2” bus uses a similar TB, except with 4 lugs per phase capability.

C-8




CABLE ASSEMBLIES (Cont’d)

Table 1

Adjacent Wireway

6”

12”

18”

A

15

1

/

2

”

15

1

/

2

”

21

1

/

2

”

B

18”

18”

24”

Front View

Fig. 1. 600-ampere (top)

20”/24” W

Front View

Fig. 2. 600-ampere (bottom)

20”/24” W

C

Front View

Side View

Fig. 3. 800/1000/1200(2")-ampere (top)

20” W

Fig. 4. 800/1000/1200-ampere (bottom)

20” W

Front View

Fig. 5. 1200-ampere (top)

20” W

BUSWAY ENTRANCES

GE motor control centers include provisions for connecting

GE busways. Busways must be braced for maximum available short circuit current. Minimum enclosure sizes for busway are shown in the adjacent table. Refer to the factory for other type busway. Include busway requisition number when ordering

Motor Control Center.

Spectra Series

TM

Busway

Entry

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Pull Box Enclosure Size

12”

–

12”

–

12"

–

20”W x 20”D

20”W x 20”D

24”W x 22”D

24”W x 22”D

24"W x 22"D

24"W x 22"D

Std

Max. Busway Ampacity

Cu Al

1000A/IN

2

Std 750A/IN

2

1600

1600

2000

2000

2500

2500

1500

1500

2000

2000

2500

2500

1350

1350

2000

2000

2500

2500

1000

1000

2000

2000

2500

2500

Note:

• Bus bars must be phased front-to-rear in 24-inch width enclosure. Bottom entry requires full section.

C-9




Fig. 6. 1600 ampere (top/bottom)

24” W

Fig. 7. 2000/2500-ampere (top/bottom)

40” W, 22” deep

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

GE motor control centers may be furnished with transfer switches manufactured by ASCO. The switch is mounted in a separate unit and cable-connected to the motor control center bus. Manual control, pushbuttons, pilot lights and switches may be door-or bracket-mounted within the unit. Up-stream overcurrent protection must be provided for each power source. The unit can be UL Listed if all components are listed for use in motor control center equipments.

The following features apply to ASCO Bulletin 940 open-type switches which are UL Listed through 480 volts AC. For specific ratings and additional optional features refer to ASCO.

• Voltage sensing of normal source

• Voltage sensing of emergency source

• Frequency sensing of emergency source

• Time delay to override momentary outage

• Retransfer to normal time delay

• Emergency generator cool-down time delay

• Transfer to emergency time delay

• Engine control contacts (1 N.O., 1 N.C.) for engine start

• Manual control for testing

• Auxiliary contacts (1 N.O., 1 N.C.)

• Indicating lights–green and red

WITHSTAND CURRENT RATINGS (WCR) FOR ASCO 940 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

MCC Space Units

➀

MCC Enclosure Widths (In Inches) Switch Rating (Amps)

➁

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

20

20

24

24

20

20

20

20

30

70

100

150

260

400

600

800

➀ Does not include space for protection; switches must be mounted at bottom of section in order to install vertical bus above switch.

➁ Larger sizes require special over-size enclosures. Refer to factory.

Available RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 480 Volts AC

When Used with Class J or L

Current-Limiting Fuses

WCR

When Used with Class RK-5 Fuses or

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Max. Fuse Size (Amps) WCR

➂

Max. Breaker Size (Amps)

100,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

60

200

200

450

600

600

1200

1200

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

35,000

35,000

50,000

50,000

50

150

150

225

600

600

1600

1600

➂ With coordinated GE CB, 70, 100 & 150 amp switches have WCR of

22,000 amps. Likewise, the 400 amp switch has 42,000 amps and

600 & 800 amp switches have 65,000 amp ratings.

C-10



INCOMING LINE REACTORS

A section containing three reactors connected ahead of the motor control center bus can be utilized to reduce the available short circuit current at the motor control center. Short-circuit protection for the reactors is normally provided in the up-stream feeder circuit.

Continuous

Amps

Enclosure Comments

600

800

1000

&

1200

24"W x 20"D

24”W x 20” D

30”W x 24”D

With main bus. Cable connected from reactor load terminals to main bus.

With main bus. Also requires top 24” of adjacent section for cable connections from reactor load terminals to main bus.

No main bus. Also requires top 30” of adjacen section for cable connections from reactor load terminals to main bus. Flush rear.

Notes:

• Sections are not UL Listed.

• Incoming power lugs are mounted on the reactor pads. Pads are

NEMA drilled.

• Specify the ohms impedance per phase required, continuous current rating, and the available short circuit current (RMS symmetrical) at the reactor load terminals.

C

TRANSITIONS

Transitions for connecting control centers to General Electric transformers, low-voltage switchgear or switchboards are available and generally the same depth as the equipment to which they are to be connected. Appropriate overcurrent protection for the control center must be provided.

C-11

GE 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers Starters

D

D-1



GENERAL

Combination motor control starter units consist of an externally operable circuit disconnect, either a fusible switch or circuit breaker, and a magnetic starter with an overload relay in the motor lines.

Unit NEMA sizes listed are based on continuous horsepower ratings. The maximum horsepower rating of each NEMA size controller is reduced for long accelerating times and for jogging or plugging duty. Jogging duty is defined as 5 or more contactor openings or closings per minute or over 10 in a 10-minute period.

Plugging is rapidly stopping or reversing the motor by reversing the phase sequence of the power supplied to the motor. Refer to the factory anytime accelerating times exceed 10 seconds or jogging or plugging duty is required.

The short-circuit interrupting rating depends on the type disconnect furnished. Select a starter combination for which the interrupting rating equals or exceeds the maximum available fault current.

Basic combination motor starter units consist of:

1. Externally operable circuit disconnect.

2. Magnetic starter with a thermal-magnetic, or electronic overload relay.

3. External overload reset operator.

4. Tapped line voltage, 120-volt CPT control power or external control power.

5. Drawout or pull-apart control terminal boards through NEMA

Size 4.

6. Drawout power terminal boards through NEMA Size 3 (when specified).

7. Extra CPT capacity for operating auxiliary relays and pilot devices (when specified).

8. Plug-in construction through NEMA Size 4 (FVNR) starters.

Bolt-in construction may require vertical bus modifications.

Specify basic starter units from the tables in this section.

Starters are listed by starter function, line voltage, HP, NEMA size, and combination short-circuit rating. Indicate type control power desired. Include any options from “Optional Modifications,” noting additional space requirements for some options.

Typical starter circuits are shown in Typical Circuits (Section K).

Starters can also be used for lighting or resistive heat loads

(Section J).

D-2



NEMA

Size

4

5

2

3

6

2

3

4

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

4

5

6

1

2

3

FVR

NEMA

Size

4

5

6

1

2

3

SELECTION TABLES

CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE, 208 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

Combination Motor Starters

FVNR

Max.

Hp

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

2.5

3

6

1

1

2

2.5

3.0

6

1

1

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

➇

➀➃

➇

➀➇

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

1.5

2

3.5

4

6

12

1.5

2

3

3

6

12

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

➀➇

➁➃

➀➇

➁➃

RVNR

Max.

Hp

10

25

40

75

150

10

25

40

75

150

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

SKL

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-to-Back

20” Deep

4

5

5

–

N/A

4

5

5.5

–

N/A

4

4

4.5

6

12

4

4

4

4.5

12

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

➂➇

➁

➆

➂

➁

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

2S1W, 2S2W

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable

Torque

Constant

Hp

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

5

7.5

20

30

60

100

7.5

10

25

40

75

150

5

7.5

20

30

60

100

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

30

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

TJC

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

TBC4

SKL

Space

Units

1 1 /

2

2

3.5

3.5

6

12

1 1 /

2

2

4

4

6

12

X

X

X

X

–

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➈

X

X

X

X

–

–

➀➃

➁➃

➈

➀➃

➁➃

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

1

2

3

4

5

Y-DELTA

2

3

4

5

Max.

Hp

10

20

40

75

–

10

20

40

75

–

2

3

4

5

20

40

60

–

20

40

60

–

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

10

–

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

–

25

25

100

–

65,100

65,100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

–

SEL

SEL

SFL

TBC4

–

TEC

TEC

TBC4

–

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

Space

Units

2

2.5

4

4.5

–

2

2.5

4.5

5

–

4

5

5.5

–

4

4.5

5.5

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➃➅

➃➅

➀

➀

➅

➃➅

➀ Requires 24-inch wide section (Size 6 requires minimum 20inch deep).

➁ Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24-inch wide sections, 20-inch deep (2S1W-RTF).

➂ Size 5 RVNR cannot be mounted in 13-inch deep enclosure.

Two Size 5 RVNR starters cannot be mounted back-to-back in the same 20-inch deep section.

➃ 12-inch wireway at bottom required.

➄ The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum.

Where layout dimensions are critical, refer to Company. One space unit or X unit equals 12 inches of vertical height.

➅ Refer to factory.

➆ For 40 HP applications requiring a thermal-magnetic CB, the disconnect will be SFT type and will require an additional .5

space height.

➇ Requires 12” bottom wireway cover to UL Label.

⑨ Requires additional 6 inches if Type "A" wiring specified.

D

D-3



NEMA

Size

4

5

2

3

6

2

3

4

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3




FVNR

Max.

Hp

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

1

1

2

2.5

3

6

1

1

2

2.5

3.5

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

➇

➀➇

➇

➀➇

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

1.5

2

3.5

4

6

12

1.5

2

3

3

6

12

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

➀➇

➁➃

➀➇

➁➃

RVNR

Max.

Hp

15

30

50

100

200

15

30

50

100

200

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

SKL

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-to-Back

20” Deep

4

5

5.5

N/A

N/A

4

5

6

N/A

N/A

4

4

4.5

6

12

4

4

4.5

4.5

12

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

➂➇

➁➇

➆

➂➇

➁➇

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

2S1W, 2S2W

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable

Torque

Constant

Hp

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

5

10

25

40

75

150

7.5

15

30

50

100

200

7.5

20

40

75

150

150

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

30

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

TJC

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

TBC4

SKL

Space

Units

1 1 /

2

2

3.5

3.5

6

12

1 1 /

2

2

4

4

6

12

X

X

X

X

–

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➈

X

X

X

X

–

–

➀

➁

➈

➀

➁

Starters

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

3

4

1

2

5

Y-DELTA

4

5

2

3

Max.

Hp

10

25

50

75

–

10

25

50

75

–

4

5

2

3

25

50

75

–

25

50

75

–

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

10

–

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

–

25

25

100

–

65,100

65,100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

–

SEL

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

TEC

TEC

TBC4

–

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

Space

Units

2

2.5

4

4.5

–

2

2.5

4.5

5

–

4

5

5.5

–

4

4.5

5.5

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➃➅

➃➅

➀

➀

➃➅

➀

➀

➃➅










space height.


➈ Requires additional 6 inches if Type "A" wiring.

D-4



NEMA

Size

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

2

3

6



3

4

1

2

5

6

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3


FVNR

Max.

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

10

25

50

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

25

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

Space

Units

1

1

2

2.5

3

6

1

1

2

2.5

3.0

6

1.5

2

3.5

4

6

12

1.5

2

3

3

6

12

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

➇

➀➇

➇

➀➇

➀➇

➁➃

➀➇

➁➃

RVNR

Max.

Hp

25

50

100

200

400

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

100

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

SKL

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-to-Back

20” Deep

4

5

5

–

N/A

4

5

6

N/A

N/A

4

4

4

4.5

12

4

4

4.5

6

12

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

➂➇

➁

➆

➂

➁

NEMA

Size

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

2S1W, 2S2W

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable

Constant

Torque

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

7.5

20

40

75

150

300

7.5

20

40

75

150

300

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

30

65

65,100

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

65

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

TEC

TJC

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

TBC4

SKL

Space

Units

1 1 /

2

2

3.5

3.5

6

12

1 1 /

2

2

4

4

6

12

X

–

–

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➈

X

–

–

X

X

X

➀➃

➁➃

➈

➀➃

➁➃

Starters

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

3

4

1

2

5

Y-DELTA

4

5

2

3

Max.

Hp

15

40

75

150

–

15

40

75

150

–

4

5

2

3

40

75

150

–

40

75

150

–

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

10

–

65,100

65,100

65,100

100

–

25

25

10

–

65,100

65,100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

TEC

TEC

TEC

SGL

–

SEL

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

TEC

TEC

SGL

–

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

Space

Units

2

2.5

4

4.5

–

2

2.5

4.5

5

–

4

5

5.5

–

4

4.5

5.5

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➃➅

➃➅

➀

➀

➃➅

➃➅










space height.



D

D-5



NEMA

Size

4

5

2

3

6

2

3

4

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

FVR

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3




FVNR

Max.

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

65

42

100

100

100

100

100

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TBC4

SKL

Space

Units

1

1

2

2.5

3

6

1

1

2

2.5

3.5

6

X

–

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

➇

➀➇

➇

➀➇

10

25

50

100

200

400

10

25

50

100

200

400

100

100

100

100

100

42

25

25

25

25

65

42

TECL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TBC4

SKL

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

SGL

SKL

1.5

2

3

3

6

12

1.5

2

3.5

4

6

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

➀➇

➁➃

➀➇

➀➃

RVNR

Max.

Hp

25

50

100

200

400

25

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

65

42

100

100

100

100

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SGL

SKL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TBC4

SKL

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-to-Back

20” Deep

4

5

6

4.5

N/A

4

5

5

N/A

N/A

4

4

4

6

12

4

4

4.5

4.5

12

X

X

–

X

X

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

➆

➂➇

➁

➂

➁

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

3

4

1

2

5

Y-DELTA

4

4

2

3

5

2

3

4

5

Max.

Hp

15

40

75

150

–

15

40

75

150

–

40

75

100

150

–

40

75

150

–

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

100

–

100

100

100

100

–

25

25

25

100

–

100

100

100

–

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

TECL

TECL

TECL

TBC4

–

SEL

SEL

SEL

TBC4

–

TECL

TECL

TBC4

–

Space

Units

2

2.5

4.5

5

–

2

2.5

4

5

–

4

4.5

5.5

–

4

5

5

5.5

–

Starters

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➃➅

➃➅










space height.



➀

➀

➀

➃➅

➀

➀

➃➅

2S1W, 2S2W

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

6

Max. Hp

Constant

Variable

Torque

Constant

Hp

10

25

50

100

200

400

7.5

20

40

75

150

300

3

4

1

2

5

6

10

25

50

100

200

400

7.5

20

40

75

150

300

IC

(kA)

25

25

25

25

22

42

100

100

100

100

100

42

Circuit

Breaker

Type

SEL

SEL

SEL

SFL

TJC

SKL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TECL

TBC4

SKL

Space

Units

1 1 /

2

2

4

4

6

12

1 1 /

2

2

3.5

3.5

6

–

X

–

X

X

–

–

UL

Listed Notes

(X)

➈

X

X

X

X

–

–

➀➃

➁➃

➈

➀➃

➁➃➅

D-6

NEMA

Size

5

5

4

4

6

2

3

1

1

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

10

25

30

40

60

75

–

7

1 /

2

10

15

25

40

75

–

3

7

1 /

2

10

20

25

40

75

–

5

6

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

3

3

6

1

1

2



FUSED SWITCH TYPE, 208 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

Combination Motor Starters➇

(For Notes, See Page D-8)

FVNR

NEMA

Size

4

5

3

4

5

6

1

1

2

5

6

3

4

2

3

1

1

4

5

6

3

3

1

2

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

10

25

30

40

60

75

–

3

7

1 /

2

10

20

25

40

75

–

7

1 /

2

10

15

25

40

75

–

5

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

100

100

65

65

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

–

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

30

60

100

100

200

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

400

–

Space

Units

1

1

1

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

–

1

1

1

1

2

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

–

X

X

1 X

2

1 /

2

X

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

X

X

X

– –

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

Notes

➃➈

➃➈

➉

➉

➃➈

FVR

5

5

10

10

–

5

5

5

100

100

65

65

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

–

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

30

60

100

100

200

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

400

–

Space

Units

5

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

–

1

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

5

9

1 /

2

–

1

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

5

9

1 /

2

–

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

Notes

➅ ➈

➅ ➈

➃➈

➅ ➈

➃➈

➉

➉

➅ ➈

➃➈

Starters

RVNR

3

4

2

3

5

6

3

4

2

3

5

6

NEMA Max.

Size Hp

5

6

4

5

2

3

4

10

25

30

40

60

75

–

10

15

25

40

75

–

10

20

25

40

75

–

5

5

5

10

10

–

100

65

65

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

100

200

200

400

400

➈

Class H, K-1, K-5

60

100

100

200

400

➈

60

100

200

200

400

➈

Class RK-1, RK-5

60

100

100

200

400

➈

60

60

100

200

400

➈

100

200

200

400

400

600

➈

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-To-Back

6

➂

➂

–

4

5

1 /

2

6

20” Deep

6

–

5

6

4

4

1 /

2

5

–➂

–

5

6

4

5

4

5

5

1 /

2

6

➂

–

4

5

4

4

6

–

4

4

4

1 /

2

5

6

–

5

5

3

4

6

2

3

1

1

5

6

3

4

2

3

1

2

2S1W

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

5

3

4

5

6

2

2

1

1

3

7

1 /

2

40

60

75

–

–

10

25

30

IC

(kA)

20

30

–

60

–

–

3 100

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

– 100

100

100

100

100

100

–

3

7

1 /

2

7

1 /

2

–

10

15

25

40

75

–

10

20

25

40

_

75

–

–

30

40

60

–

3

5

7

1 /

2

20

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

–

15

20

–

–

–

100

65

65

100

100

100

5

10

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

Class J

Switch

UL

Clip Space Listed

Amps Amps Units (X)

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

–

60

60

100

200

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

200

200

400

–

4

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

4

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

–

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

4

5

2

2

–

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

5

9

1 /

2

–

–

–

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

Notes

➃➅

➃➅

➃➈

➃➅

➃➅

➃➈

➉

➉

➃➅

➃➅

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X X

X X

–

X

X

X

X

X➉

X➉

X

X X

–

X

X

X

X

X X

–

D

D-7






5

5

3

4

6

2

3

1

1

5

6

3

4

2

3

1

2

2S2W

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

5

3

4

5

6

2

2

1

1

3

7

1 /

2

–

10

25

30

40

60

75

–

IC

(kA)

20

30

–

60

–

–

3 100

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

– 100

100

100

100

100

100

–

3

7

1 /

2

7

1 /

2

–

10

15

25

40

75

–

10

20

25

40

_

75

–

–

30

40

60

–

3

5

7

1 /

2

20

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

–

15

20

–

–

–

100

65

65

100

100

–

5

10

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

Class J

Switch

UL

Clip Space Listed

Amps Amps Units (X)

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

–

600

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

1 1 /

2

1

1

/

2

4

5

2

2

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

–

X

–

X

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30 30

60 30

60

100

100

200

400

–

60

60

100

200

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

200

200

400

–

4

5

9

1 /

2

–

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

–

1 1 /

2

1

1

/

2

2

4

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

Notes

➃➅

➃➅

➃➅

➅

➅

➈

➉

➉

➃➅

➃➅

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

4

5

3

4

2

3

1

1

3

4

5

1

2

1

1

3

4

5

1

2

3

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

10

20

30

40

60

–

3

7

1 /

2

7

1 /

2

15

20

30

60

–

10

20

40

75

––

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

100

100

65

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

200

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

–

30

30

60

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

200

400

–

30

100

100

200

400

–

30

60

100

200

400

–

Space

Units

6

–

5

5

2

2

2

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

5

6

–

2

2

2

3

5

6

–

2

3

4

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➃➈

➄

➃➈

➉

➃➈

Starters

Y-DELTA

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

2

2

2

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

10

20

30

40

60

–

7

1 /

2

10

15

20

30

40

60

–

3

7

1 /

2

20

40

60

–

4

4

3

3

5

2

2

2

3

4

5

2

2

2

10

10

–

5

5

5

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

200

400

400

–

60

60

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

100

200

400

–

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

–

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

Space

Units

5

5

1 /

2

5

1 /

2

6

–

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

1 /

2

6

–

4

4

4

4

1 /

2

5

1 /

2

5

1 /

2

6

–

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➁

➀

➀

➀

➆

➃➈

➁

➀

➆

➃➈

➁

➀

➀

➀

➆

➃➈

➃

➄

➅

➀

➁

➂

➆

➇

➈

➉

Requires 24-inch wide section (Size 6 requires minimum 20inch deep).

Size 1 not available. Use Size 2.

Size 5 RNVR cannot be mounted in 13-inch deep enclosure.


12-inch wireway at bottom required.

Use time-delay fuse, maximum rating same as switch amps.

Size 5 FVR, 2S1W, 2S2W with fused switch requires (2) adjacent sections; left hand section is 24-inch wide 6X, right hand section is 20-inch wide with top 3

1

/

2

X used for disconnect.

Size 4 Wye-Delta with fused switch requires a 24-inch wide section when main horizontal bus is rated 1000 ampere UL or less. A 30-inch wide section is required with 1200 ampere UL or higher rated main horizontal bus.

The space requirements shown in these tables are minimum.


Refer to factory.

Use size 4 spacing for 100K ratings.

Requires 12” bottom wireway cover to UL Label.

Class J Table is based on fast-acting Class J fuses. For time delay Class J fuses (Std.) use RK-1, RK-5 Table.

Requires additional 6 inches if Type"A" wiring.

D-8

FVR

3

4

1

2

5

6

5

6

3

4

1

1

2

NEMA

Size

5

6

4

5

6

2

3

1

1

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

15

30

50

75

100

150

200

7

1 /

2

15

30

50

100

200

2

7

1 /

2

15

30

60

100

–






FVNR

NEMA

Size

5

5

3

4

6

6

1

1

2

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

3

1

1

Max.

Hp

3

7

1 /

2

15

30

50

75

100

150

200

2

7

1 /

2

15

30

60

100

–

7

1 /

2

15

30

50

100

200

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

100

100

65

100

100

100

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

400

400

600

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

400

400

600

800

1200

30

30

60

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

100

200

400

600

–

30

60

100

200

400

600

30

60

100

200

400

600

Space

Units

1

1

1

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

6

1

1

1

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

–

1

1

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀ ➊

➀ ➊

➀➈

➀ ➊

5

10

10-

–

5

5

5

100

100

65

100

100

100

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

400

400

600

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

400

400

600

800

1200

30

30

60

100

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

100

200

400

600

–

30

60

100

200

400

600

30

60

100

200

400

600

Space

Units

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

12

12

1

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

5

9

1 /

2

–

1

1 /

2

2

3

1 /

2

5

9

1 /

2

12

UL

Listed

(X)

X

–

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

Notes

➅ ➊

➅ ➊

➁

➁

➅ ➊

➁➈

➅ ➊

➁

Starters

RVNR

4

5

2

3

6

4

5

2

3

6

NEMA Max.

Size Hp

6

6

5

5

3

4

2

2

75

100

150

200

10

15

30

50

15

30

60

100

–

15

30

50

100

200

5

5

10

10

–

100

65

100

100

100

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

100

200

400

400

600

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

100

100

200

400

400

600

800

1200

60

100

200

400

➈

100

200

400

600

➈

Class RK-1, RK-5

60

100

60

100

200

400

600

200

400

600

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-To-Back

20” Deep

6

➂

➂

4

4

5

1 /

2

N/A

N/A

4

4

4

1 /

2

5

6

6

12➁

12➁

4

5

1 /

2

6

➂

–

6

➂

4

5

N/A

4

4

1 /

2

5

6

–

5

6

4

4

12➁

2S1W

4

5

3

4

6

1

2

2

3

4

2

3

1

1

2

5

6

4

5

6

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

5

2

3

2

2

1

1

6

6

5

6

3

7

1 /

2

50

75

100

–

–

10

15

30

150

200

2

7

1 /

2

–

50

60

100

125

200

15

–

30

–

7

1 /

2

–

15

30

–

50

100

200

2

5

7

1 /

2

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

10 100

25

30

40

75

150

10

15

25

30

40

50

75

100

150

IC

Class J

Switch

(kA) Amps Amps Units

UL

Clip Space Listed

(X)

3 100

5 100

7

1 /

2

100

10 100

–

25

40

75

–

100

125

150

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

5

5

5

10

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

10

65

100

100

100

100

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

60

100

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

600

600

600

600

600

–

1200

Class H, K-1, K-5

30 30

30

60

60

60

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30 30

60

60

30

60

100

200

200

400

600

100

100

200

400

600

12

12

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

12

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

4

5

2

4

12

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

5

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

12

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

4

2

2

5

9

1 /

2

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

X

–

–

X

–

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

Notes

➅

➅

➁

➁

➅

➁

➅

➅

➁

➁

➁

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D

D-9






5

6

6

4

4

5

1

1

2

2

3

3

1

2

2

3

4

4

5

6

2S2W

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

2

2

3

4

5

1

1

2

5

6

6

6

3

7

1 /

2

–

10

15

30

50

75

100

–

150

200

3

5

7

1

/

2

10

–

25

40

75

–

100

125

150

7 1 /

2

–

15

30

–

50

100

200

2 2

7

1

–

/

2

5

7

1

/

2

15 10

–

30

–

50

60

100

125

200

15

25

30

40

50

75

100

150

5

7 1 /

2

10

25

30

40

75

150

IC

Class J

Switch


UL

Clip Space Listed

(X)

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

100

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

5

5

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

60

100

200

400

400

600

600

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

800

1200

Class H, K-1, K-5

200

200

400

400

600

600

30

30

60

60

100

100

Class RK-1, RK-5

200

400

400

600

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

600

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

600

5

5

9 1 /

2

9

1 /

2

12

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

12

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

5

5

9

1

/

2

9

1 /

2

12

12

12

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

2

4

5

9

1

/

2

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

–

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

Notes

➅

➅

➁

➁

➁

➅

➅

➁

➁

➅

➁

Y-DELTA

2

2

2

2

3

4

5

3

4

2

3

4

5

2

2

2

NEMA

Size

2

2

2

3

4

5

Max.

Hp

3

7

1

/

2

10

30

75

–

2

7

1

/

2

10

25

30

50

60

75

–

7

1

/

2

10

15

20

30

60

–

PART WINDING

1

2

3

1

1

4

5

3

4

1

2

2

3

4

5

NEMA

Size

2

3

1

1

4

4

5

2

7

1

/

2

10

25

30

50

60

75

–

7 1 /

2

15

20

30

60

–

Max.

Hp

3

7 1 /

2

10

30

50

75

–

5

5

5

5

5

5

10

10

–

100

100

100

65

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

100

200

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

100

200

400

400

–

30

30

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30 30

60

100

100

400

–

60

100

100

400

–

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

Space

Units

2

2

2

1 /

2

4

1

/

2

5

6

–

2

3

4

2

2

6

–

5

6

2

2

1

/

2

3

4

6

–

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➈

➉

➉

➉

➉

➉

➈

➈

5

5

5

10

5

5

5

10

–

100

100

100

100

65

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

60

100

30

60

100

200

400

–

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

60

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

60

60

60

100

100

30

60

60

100

100

400

–

400

–

4

4 1 /

2

5

1

/

2

6

6

–

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

1

/

2

6

–

Space

Units

4

4

4

5

6

–

Starters

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➄

➄

➉

➉

➀➉

➀➉

➆

➆➉

➈

➀

➀

➆

➈

➄

➀

➆

➈

➀

➁

➂

➃

➅

➆

➇

➈

➉


Size 6 FVR, RVNR, 2S1W, 2S2W require (2) adjacent 24-inch wide sections, 20-inch deep, with 12-inch bottom wireway cover.





1

/

2





Refer to factory.




Class J Table is based on fast acting Class J fuses. For time delay Class J fuses (Std.) use RK1, RK5 Table.

Requires Additional 6 inches if Type "A" wiring.

D-10



NEMA

Size

4

5

3

4

5

6

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

5

5

6

5

5

3

4

6

2

3

1

2

Max.

Hp

5

10

15

25

50

60

100

150

200

250

7

1 /

2

10

15

25

30

50

75

100

150

200

400




FVNR

NEMA

Size

4

5

3

4

5

6

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

5

5

6

5

5

3

4

6

6

2

3

1

2

10

15

25

30

50

100

125

200

250

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

5

5

10

10

5

5

–

5

10

10

10

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30 30

30

60

60

60

60

100

100

200

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

600

400

400

600

600

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

600

Space

Units

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

3

1

3

1

4

1

4

1

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

6

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

3

1

4

1

4

1 /

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

6

6

1

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

1

3

1

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀ ➊

➀➃➉

➀

➀ ➊

FVR

Max.

Hp

5

10

15

25

50

60

100

150

200

250

7

1 /

2

10

15

25

30

50

75

100

150

200

400

10

15

25

30

50

100

125

200

250

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

5

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

10

10

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

100

100

200

200

30

30

60

60

400

400

600

100

200

200

400

30

30

60

60

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

100

200

200

400

400

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

1

1

1

1

/

2

/

2

2

3

2

1 /

2

5

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

1

1

1

1

/

2

/

2

2

3

2

1

3

1

/

2

/

2

5

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

1

1

2

/

2

3

2

1

3

1

/

2

/

2

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

Notes

➅

➅

➁

➅

➅

➁

➅ ➅

➅ ➅

➁➉

Starters

RVNR

5

5

4

4

6

3

3

2

2

NEMA Max.

Size Hp

5

6

4

5

3

4

2

2

15

25

50

60

100

100

200

250

15

25

30

50

75

100

150

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600➉

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

600

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-To-Back

20” Deep

4

5

4

1 /

2

6

6

➂

➂

N/A

4

4

4

1 /

2

6

6

5

5

12➁

4

4

5

5

1 /

2

6

6

➂

➂

N/A

5

5

4

4

6

➂

➂

N/A

N/A

5

6

6

12➁

12➁

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

1 /

2

6

6

5

5

12➁

5

6

4

5

6

3

3

2

2

15

25

30

50

100

125

200

250

400

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

2S1W

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

6

6

5

5

5

5

3

4

6

6

2

3

1

2

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

5

5

6

7

1 /

2

10

75

100

150

200

15

25

30

50

250

400

50

100

125

200

10

15

25

30

250

400

5

10

15

25

–

50

60

100

150

200

250

7

1 /

2

–

10

20

25

40

75

–

150

–

250

300

7

1 /

2

100

15 100

20

30

40

75

100

150

250

300

IC

Class J

Switch


UL

Clip Space Listed

(X)

7

5

1

100

/

2

100

15

20

25

40

50

75

150

–

200

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

5

5

10

10

5

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

30

30

60

60

60

100

100

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

600

600

200

400

400

600

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

30

30

60

100

100

200

60

60

100

200

400

400

600

600

200

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

1 1

1 1

2

2

4

4

5

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

/

2

/

2

12

12

12

4

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

5

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

4

4

2

2

12

12

–

–

X

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

Notes

➃➅

➃➅

➁

➅

➅

➁

➁

➃➅

➃➅

➁

➁➉

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D-11






2S2W

5

6

6

3

4

5

1

2

2

3

4

5

5

6

6

2

2

3

1

1

3

4

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

5

3

4

5

6

2

2

3

1

1

50

60

100

150

200

250

5

10

15

25

–

7

1 /

2

10

10

15

25

30

50

100

125

200

250

400

40

75

100

150

250

300

40

50

75

150

–

200

7

5

1

100

/

2

100

15

20

25

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

7

1 /

2

–

100

150

200

250

400

15 10

25 20

30 25

50

75

40

75

–

150

–

250

300

IC

Class J

Switch


UL

Clip Space Listed

(X)

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

5

5

10

7

1 /

2

100

15

20

30

100

100

65

65

100

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

30

30

60

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

100

200

200

400

400

600

30

30

60

60

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

12

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

12

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

5

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

4

4

5

9

5

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

X

–

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

1

2

1

1

3

3

4

4

5

1

1

1

2

2

2

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

Max.

Hp

5

10

15

25

50

60

100

150

–

7

1 /

2

10

15

25

30

40

50

75

100

150

–

10

15

25

30

50

60

100

125

–

5

10

10

10

–

5

5

5

5

5

5

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

30

60

60

100

100

100

200

200

400

–

100

200

200

400

–

30

30

60

60

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

100

200

200

400

400

–

30

60

60

60

100

100

100

200

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

–

30

30

60

60

100

200

200

200

–

Space

Units

2

2

2

2

1

4

1

/

2

/

2

6

–

5

5

2

2

2

1 /

2

3

5

6

–

4

5

2

2

2

2

1 /

2

3

3

4

5

5

6

–

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➃➅

➃➅

➁

➉

➉

➃➈

➅

➅

➁

➁

➃➅

➃➅

➁

➁➉

Notes

➃➈

➉

➃➈

Starters

Y-DELTA

100

150

–

7

1 /

2

40

50

75

100

10

15

25

30

150

–

10

15

25

30

50

60

100

125

–

Max.

Hp

5

10

15

25

50

60

2

3

2

2

2

2

2

4

5

3

4

4

4

5

3

4

2

3

4

5

2

2

2

NEMA

Size

2

2

2

2

3

3

100

100

–

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

10

10

–

100

100

100

100

65

100

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

60

60

100

200

30

60

60

100

200

200

60

100

100

100

200

200

400

–

200

400

–

400

400

–

Class H, K-1, K-5

60 30

60

60

60

60

60

100

100

100

200

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

60 30

60

60

30

60

100

100

200

200

400

–

60

100

200

200

200

–

4

4

1 /

2

5

1

/

2

6

6

–

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

–

4

4

1 /

2

5

1

/

2

6

6

–

4

4

4

Space

Units

4

4

4

4

5

5

1 /

2

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➄

➀➉

➀

➀➉

➆

➃➈

➄

➀

➀

➀

➆

➃➈

➄

➉

➀ ➊

➀

➀

➆

➃➈

➃

➄

➅

➀

➁

➂

➆

➇

➈

➉








1

/

2





Refer to factory.




Class J Table is based on fast acting Class J fuses. For time delay Class J fuses (Std.) use RK-1, RK-5 Table.

Requires additional 6 inches if Type "A" wiring.

D-12

5

6

3

4

2

3

1

2

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

6

2

2

1

1

Max.

Hp

7

1 /

2

10

20

25

30

50

75

100

200

250

10

20

25

40

50

100

200

400

FVR

4

5

6

3

3

1

2






FVNR

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

6

2

2

1

1

4

5

6

3

3

1

2

4

5

3

3

6

1

2

2

Max.

Hp

7

1 /

2

10

75

100

200

250

20

25

30

50

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

10

20

25

40

50

100

200

400

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

5

5

10

10

10

5

5

5

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

100

100

200

200

30

30

60

60

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

30

60

200

200

200

400

600

60

100

200

400

600

30

60

100

100

200

200

400

600

Space

Units

1

1

1

1

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

1

1

1

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

2

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

1

1

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

3

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

Notes

➀ ➊

➀➁➉

➀ ➊

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

5

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

100

100

200

200

30

30

60

60

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

100

100

200

200

400

600

30

60

200

200

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

200

400

600

Space

Units

1

1

1

1

/

2

/

2

2

3

2

1

3

1

/

2

/

2

5

9

5

1 /

2

12

1

1 /

2

2

5

5

9

5

1 /

2

12

1

1 /

2

2

3

2

1

3

1

/

2

/

2

9

5

1 /

2

12

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

Notes

➅

➁

➅ ➅

➁➉

➅

➁

Starters

RVNR

3

4

2

3

5

6

4

5

6

3

3

2

2

NEMA Max.

Size Hp

5

6

4

4

3

3

2

2

IC

(kA)

20

25

30

50

100

100

100

100

75 100

100 100

200 100

250 100

20

25

40

50

100

200

400

5

5

5

5

10

10

10

25

40

100

100

50 100

100 100

200 100

400 100

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

60

60

100

100

200

400

600

60

100

100

200

200

400

600➉

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

60

200

200

200

400

600

60

60

100

200

400

600

Space Units

➃

13” Deep or

Back-To-Back

20” Deep

4

4

4

4

5

5 4

1 /

2

4

1 /

2

6

6

➂

N/A

5

5

6

12➁

4

4

5

5

1 /

2

6

➂

N/A

4

6

6

6

➂

N/A

4

4

4

4

1 /

2

5

6

12➁

5

5

4

5

6

12➁

2S1W

3

4

2

3

1

2

2

6

6

5

5

5

6

3

4

1

2

3

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

5

6

6

7

1 /

2

10

20

25

30

50

75

100

200

–

250

IC

Class J

Switch

UL

Clip Space Listed

(kA) Amps Amps Units (X)

7

1 /

2

100

–

20

–

25

40

75

–

150

200

250

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

600

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

600

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

4

4

2

2

5

9

5

1 /

2

12

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

10

–

20

25

40

50

100

–

200

350

400

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

7

1

–

40

–

–

–

–

/

2

10

20

–

40

–

75

100

150

300

–

5

5

5

10

5

5

5

10

10

10

10

7

1 /

2

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class H, K-1, K-5

30

60

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

30

30

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

200

200

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

200

400

600

4

5

9

1 /

2

9

1 /

2

1 1 /

2

2

2

2

4

12

12

1 1 /

2

2

5

5

5

9

1 /

2

12

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➅

➁

➁

➅

➅

➁➉

➁➉

➅

➁

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D

D-13






4

5

6

3

3

1

2

4

5

3

3

2

2

1

2

5

6

6

2S2W

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

5

6

6

Max. Hp

NEMA

Size CT/VT

Const.

Hp.

7

1 /

2

10

20

25

30

50

75

100

200

–

250

7

1 /

2

–

20

–

25

40

75

–

150

200

250

10

–

7

1

10

20 20

25 –

/

2

40

50

100

–

200

350

400

40

–

75

100

150

300

–

10

25

40

50

100

200

400

7

1 /

2

–

40

–

–

–

–

5

5

10

10

5

5

5

5

10

10

10

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Class J

Switch

UL

Clip Space Listed

Amps Amps Units (X)

100

100

200

200

30

30

60

60

400

600

600

Class H, K-1, K-5

30 30

60

60

60

100

100

200

400

400

600

600

30

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

600

Class RK-1, RK-5

30

60

200

200

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

200

400

600

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

600

1 1 /

2

1 1 /

2

4

4

2

2

5

9

5

1 /

2

12

12

1 1 /

2

2

2

2

4

4

5

9

1

9

1

/

2

/

2

12

12

1 1 /

2

2

5

5

9

5

1 /

2

12

X

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

–

–

–

Notes

➃➅

➁

➁

➃➅

➃➅

➁ ➉

➁➉

➅

➁

Y-DELTA

4

4

3

3

5

2

2

2

2

4

5

3

4

2

2

2

NEMA

Size

4

4

3

3

5

2

2

2

2

Max.

Hp

7

1 /

2

20

25

30

50

75

100

150

–

10

25

40

75

100

150

–

50

75

100

150

–

10

15

20

25

Starters

5

10

10

–

5

5

5

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

200

200

200

400

–

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

30

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

– –

Class H, K-1, K-5

60

60

100

30

60

100

200

200

400

–

200

200

400

–

Class RK-1, RK-5

100

200

200

400

–

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

4

4

4

4

5

5

1 /

2

6

6

–

4

4

4

5

1 /

2

6

6

–

4

4

4

4

5

1 /

2

5

1 /

2

6

6

–

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➄

➀

➀

➀

➆

➈

➄

➉

➀

➀

➆

➈

➄

➀

➀

➀

➆

➈

PART WINDING

NEMA

Size

3

3

2

2

1

2

1

1

4

4

5

2

2

2

1

1

4

5

3

4

3

3

4

4

5

2

2

1

1

Max.

Hp

7

1 /

2

10

15

20

25

30

50

75

100

150

–

10

15

20

25

40

75

100

150

–

10

15

20

25

50

75

100

150

–

5

5

5

5

5

5

10

10

–

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

IC

(kA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

Class J

Switch Clip

Amps Amps

30

60

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

60

100

100

200

30

30

60

60

200

400

–

Class H, K1, K5

100

100

200

200

30

60

60

60

400

400

–

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

–

Class RK1, RK5

200

200

200

400

–

30

60

60

60

100

200

200

400

–

30

30

60

60

Space

Units

2

2

2

2

1

2

1

/

2

/

2

3

4

1 /

2

5

5

6

–

5

5

5

6

–

2

2

2

1

2

1

/

2

/

2

6

–

5

5

2

2

2

1

2

1

/

2

/

2

3

UL

Listed

(X)

Notes

➈

➈

➈

➃

➄

➅

➀

➁

➂

➆

➇

➈

➉








1

/

2





Refer to factory.



Class J Table is based on fast acting Class J fuses. For time delay Class J fuses (Std.) use RK-1, RK-5 Table.

Requies additional 6 inches if Type "A" wiring.

D-14



STARTER OPTIONS

Option Function

Control Transformer

CPT Primary Fuses Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded transformer primary conductor.

CPT Secondary Fuse One Class H or Equivalent

Fuse wired in ungrounded

Control Power Conductor

Control Power Fuse

Provides 120V control power.

See “Control Transformer” for details

Standard OL Relay

One Class CC fuse wired in each ungrounded control power conductor. Use when control power source is remote from unit.

1 NC contact (standard)–

1 NC and 1 NO (pilot duty) contact (Optional)

Additional

Space

Required

–

–

–

–

–

Ambient Comp. OL

Electronic OL

Pilot Lights

Full Voltage

Transformer

LED➀

Push-to-test

Push buttons

Start-Stop➀

Stop➀

Stop➀

Fwd, Rev, Stop➀

Fast, Slow, Stop➀

Selector Switches

On-Off

Ultimate trip current remains essentially unchanged over a range of OL ambient temperatures.

1 NC contact (standard)

1 NC and 1 NO (pilot duty) contact (Optional)

CR104P type with 120V lamp.

Red–ON FAST, FWD, UP

Amber–DOWN, REV, SLOW

Green–STOPPED, READY

CR104P with 6V lamp

(See full voltage lights for lens colors)

CR104P Type transformer type with 6V LED Lamp

CR104P, Full-voltage transformer type, or LED (See full-voltage lights for lens colors)

CR104P momentary type-use with FVNR starters with 3-wire control.

CR104P momentary type-provides stop function at MCC with

3-wire control.

CR104P maintained type–provides stop function at MCC with

2/3 wire control. Can be furnished with mushroom head and provision for locking open.

CR104P momentary type-use with FVR starters.

CR104P momentary type-use with 2-speed starters.

CR104P maintained type–use as permissive start with 2 or 3 wire control.

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Starters

Option Function

Hand-Off-Auto➀

Fast-Slow-Off-Auto CR104P maintained type–use with 2-speed starters.

Fixed Control TB Stationary control terminal boards in place of split type terminal boards.

Power TB

CR104P maintained type–use to select auto or manual start with

2-wire control.

Stationary motor lead terminal boards Size 3 and 4 split type terminal boards. (NEMA size 1, 2)

Additional

Space

Required

–

–

–

–

– Shielded Unit Racking Disconnect must be in open posi-

Screw tion to rack unit in or out.

Control Disconnect High density pull-apart TB will provide foreign voltage isolation without disengaging the unit vertical bus stabs.

Control Relay MCR4 Type (standard) Rated

600V, with 10A contacts. Relays are available with normally open and normally closed non-convertible contacts. Up to four additional contact blocks can be added to basic 4 pole relay. Size

1 and Size 2 FVNR starters require an additional half-space unit for two to four relays. One relay can be added with no increase in space units. CR7RA Alternate Relay

CR120B type (optional), rated

600V, with 10A convertible contacts. Three 4/8 pole relays will mount in a half-space unit extension, plus nine additional terminal board points. Size 1 and 2 FVNR starters require an additional half-space unit for one to three relays. One relay can be added on other starters with no increase in space unit.

Timing Relays

Pneumatic

Timing Relays

Electronic

CR7R (standard) .3 to 3 seconds or 10 to 180 seconds timing range. 10A contacts. 4 INST and

2 TD interlocks (NO and NC).

Time-delay on energization/deenergization double pole, double throw contacts rated 600V, 10A.

Timing ranges 1-10 or 10-300 seconds.

1

–

Yes

Yes

/

2

X

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D

➀ Functions also available with ECM keypad.

D-15



STARTER OPTIONS

Option

Motor Driven

Accelerating Relay

Decelerating Relay

Compelling Relays

Function

Used for long timing periods.

Specify timing range.

CR7R (standard) timing relay for multi-speed motors to provide definite accelerating time for each speed above first speed.

Time interval is adjustable .3 to

30 seconds. Alternate

Electronic Timer.

CR7R (standard) timing relay allows time for motor to coast stop before permitting restart or coast to a lower speed on multispeed motors before initiating slow speed operation (2-speed motors). Time interval is adjustable .3 to 30 seconds. Alternate Electronic Timer.

On multi-speed starters, requires the controller to progress in sequence from low to high speed.

One relay is required for each speed over one. Requires same space as CR7R timing relay.

Alternate Electronic Timer.

Additional

Space

Required

1 /

2

X

Latch Relay CR120BL, 4 pole. Once relay closes, mechanical latch holds relay closed until electrically reset.

Requires same space as CR120B

(4 pole) control relay.

Ambient Comp. CB’s Thermal trip is ambient compensated.

Fused Switch Auxiliary 2-10A auxiliary interlocks oper-

Interlock ated by disconnect operator

(2NO, or 1NO and 1NC)

CB Options

Aux. Interlock SPDT auxiliary interlocks mounted in CB. Refer to factory if more than 2 required.

Bell Alarm

Key Interlock

Internal CB alarm switch.

Added to disconnect operating handle to require a predetermined system operating sequence.

Specify operating sequence.

Ground Fault➀

Current Transformer

Amp Transducer

Zero sequence sensing Ground

Fault Relay for equipment protection for NEMA size 1-6 starters.

Donut type CT located in one motor phase conductor for purchasers use. Purchaser connects directly to CT secondary terminals.

(Also used for door mounted

Ammeter.)

Integrated CT/Current transducer with 4-20 MA output. (Requires

120V Power).

1

1

1

–

–

–

–

–

/

2

X

/

2

X

/

2

X

➀ Functions also available with ECM, Display.

UL

Listed

(X)

–

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Starters

Option Function

Ammeter ➀

Voltmeter

AC panel-type, single currenttransformer operated five-ampere movement. Scale selected based on 125% motor full-load amperes.

AC panel-type, direct-reading 600 volts maximum. Includes a fuse in each ungrounded conductor.

Elapsed Time Meter ➀ Mounts on pushbutton bracket.

Visible from front of MCC.

Phase Loss/Unbalance

Current Sensing

Alternate ECM

CR324X Electronic overload module senses unbalanced running motor currents (no reversal).

Phase Loss/Unbalance APVR used primarily to sense

Voltage Sensing phase loss, unbalance, or reversal, has time delay under-voltage.

Motor Winding Heater The motor winding heater is designed for use with 3-phase AC motors to guard against damage caused by condensation buildup on motor windings which can occur in high humidity environments during motor idle periods.

Refer to application data in Components (Section H). (1x-size 5)

Coil Suppressor, 120V Surge suppressors reduce undesirable transients in control circuits by absorbing voltage transients generated by operating coils.

Over Size Unit Standard unit height may be increased

1 /

2

X or 1X

Door Diagram

Wire markers

V-Gnd Bus Stab

Circuit diagram mounted on back of unit door.

Permanent wire number identification on each control wire.

Grounds unit to V-ground bus when specified (order ground bus under “Structure”).

Provision For PLC See Programmable Logic Control

(Section F).

Provision for GENIUS See Programmable Logic Control

(Section F).

Provision for PFC

Capacitor

Terminals located between contactor and OL relay.

Additional

Space

Required

1 /

2

X ➀

1

–

–

–

–

/

2

X

–

1 /

2

X,

1X

–

–

–

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

D-16



PRODUCT INFORMATION

UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Standard starters drop out when line voltage drops below approximately 65 percent rated volts and can be reclosed when voltage returns to 85 percent rated volts.

Where momentary contact devices are used in standard three-wire control circuits, the starter will not reclose on momentary loss of voltage until the START button is pushed, thus inherently providing undervoltage protection.

If a maintained contact device, such as a float switch, is used to start the motor, the starter will close automatically upon restoration of control voltage. In some cases, this may not be desirable for safety reasons, and a reset pushbutton and auxiliary relay should be specified to provide undervoltage protection.

LONG CONTROL CIRCUITS

On exceedingly long control circuits two problems may occur– (1) starter will not close due to line voltage drop and (2) starter may not open due to capacitive coupling. Table below gives the one-way distances (in feet) from the starter to the pushbutton along the route of the control cable. This table is for

120-volt coils and allows for a maximum voltage variation of 10 percent. The distances are given for #14 and #12 AWG control wire.

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

1-6 ➀

Distance in Feet

With #14 Wire

1300

460

320

250

5000

Distance in Feet with #12 Wire

2070

730

510

395

6000

➀ Distance based on using an interposing relay, type MCR4, CR7A

[CR120B is 1600/2500 feet]

OVERLOAD RELAYS

Standard relays are three-leg block bimetallic type with adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of the heater rating. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. A single reset button mounted on the starter door permits external reset. Ambient-compensated relays are available for ambients from –30°C to +80°C and have adjustment from 90 to 110 percent of normal rating. Improved protection is provided when the motor is in a relatively constant ambient but control is subject to varying ambient. Relays are interchangeable with standard type.

SEPARATE SOURCE CONTROL CIRCUITS

A separate control bus is available as an option. This bus can be fed from a separate external source, or from within the motor control center by a separate distribution transformer or distribution panel.

A normally open auxiliary contact should be specified on each unit disconnect to open the control bus circuit when the unit disconnect is opened. Unit control circuit fusing should also be added.

In lieu of the auxiliary disconnect contact, pull-apart terminal boards may be specified to provide control voltage isolation for individual starters.

OPTIONAL ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD

RELAY

Both analog and digital relays are also available with or without communications (see page H-11).

CONTROL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Motor control circuits tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, such as line-to-line control and line-to-neutral control are protected by fuses in each ungrounded conductor.

UL requires rejection type fuses for equipment rated above 10KA short-circuit rating. 10 ampere, 600-volt Class CC fuses are furnished as standard. If loading dictates a larger fuse, the fuse rating may be increased up to 20 amperes maximum. Time delay

Class J fuses are available as an option.

Motor control circuit transformers are protected with a fuse in each ungrounded secondary conductor. Secondary fuses are

(Class RK-5) sized on the basis of 125 percent rated secondary

(20 amperes maximum). UL requires primary transformer protection in accordance with NEC Article 430-72(c). ATM-R fuses are furnished in each ungrounded primary conductor.

Motor control circuit power, other than power tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect, should be protected against overcurrent. The protective device may be located at the source or by the optional fuse(s) located in each unit. Normally, one (Class CC) fuse in the ungrounded conductor will provide the needed protection.

Where wiring external to the motor control center is indicated,

No. 14 AWG copper will be assumed as the minimum conductor size unless otherwise specified.

PILOT DEVICES

Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc., are singleunit, heavy-duty oil-tight type mounted on the starter unit door.

Auxiliary Contact Ratings

NEMA Size 1-6

AC Volts

115

230

460

575

DC Volts

125

250

Continuous

10

10

10

10

10

10

Amperes

Make

60

30

15

12

–

–

Break

6.0

3.0

1.5

1.2

1.1

0.5

D

D-17



PRODUCT INFORMATION

STARTER AUXILIARY CONTACTS

(OPTION)

Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amperes, 600 volts are available, either normally open or closed (non-convertible). Quantities of contacts shown are maximum available and include starter requirements for cross-electrical interlocking and holding circuits. If more contacts are required than shown, a relay must be added.

Starter Type

1

5

Total Control Contacts Available

(includes contacts required in basic control circuit for seal-in, cross interlocking, etc.)

NEMA Size Starter

2 3

6➁ 6

4

6

5

6

6

6 Full-voltage, Nonreversing

Full voltage, Reversing

Forward Contactor

Reverse Contactor

Two-speed, One winding➀

Low-speed Contactor

High-speed Contactor

Two-speed, Two winding

Low-speed Contactor

High-speed Contactor

Part Winding

Run Contactor

Autotransformer, Reduced-voltage

Run Contactor

➀ For constant- or variable-torque motors.

➁ Limit 4 with APVR relay.

4

3

4

4

4

4

5

–

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

5

5

4

4

5

5

CONTROL TERMINALS

The table below lists the total number of control terminals available on standard heights units. Nine additional control terminal points (12 for HD) can be provided for each 6-inch increase in unit height. See standard diagrams in Typical Circuits (Section K) for number of control terminals required for standard starters. Note total number of control points are in addition to T1, T2 and T3 power terminal points.

Starter

Function

FVNR

FVR

2S1W

2S2W

Size 1

CB/FS

OPT HD

12

21

27

27

18

30

24

24

Size 2

CB/FS

OPT HD

12

30

15

27

18

42

36

36

Size 3

CB/FS

OPT HD

15

33

24

33

18

48

48

48

Size 4

CB

OPT

FS

HD

24 18 21 48

33 48 24 48

24 48 24 48

33 48 24 48

CB = Circuit Breaker; FS = Fused Switch; HD = High Density; OPT= 3-point split type.

300 LINE STANDARD COIL DATA

CONTROL TRANSFORMERS

Power is tapped from the load side of the starter unit disconnect and the transformer provides 120-volt power. Two 600-volt primary fuses, plus one 250-volt secondary fuse in the ungrounded conductor is standard.

Standard control power transformer ratings are adequate to handle the starter-coil current and three pilot lights. If additional burdens are expected, larger transformers should be specified.

Starter Size and Type

➂

All Size 1 60

All Size 2 150

All Size 3 300

All Size 4 300

All Size 5 and 6

CPT Std.

VA

CPT Max.

VA

➄

60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz

60

150

300

300

300

150

150

250

250

250

150

150

300

300

500

150

150

250

250

500

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➃

➂ Refer to Company for part-winding and Y-delta starters.

➃ Starter coils operated at line voltage. Starters operated by control relay in 120volt control circuit. Class CC fuses are provided for starter coil circuit.

➄ Without increasing standard unit space requirements.

COIL CHARACTERISTICS

Size and Type

Size 1, FVNR, FVR

Size 2, FVNR, FVR

Size 3, FVNR, FVR

Size 4, FVNR, FVR

Size 5, FVNR

Size 6, FVNR

Size 2, 2S1W

Size 3, 2S1W

Size 4, 2S1W

Relay for RVNR

Size 3 and 4

Relay for FVNR

Size 5 and 6

Inrush

Volt–Amp

151

528

1152

1248

2580

3360

576

1248

1336

55

55

Sealed

Volt–Amp

191

255

75

87

95

23

60

83

87

9

9

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

Coil

Inrush

Holding

Inrush

Holding

Inrush

Holding

Inrush

Holding

Inrush

Holding

Inrush

Holding

Amps

120V

1.26

.2

4.4

.5

9.6

.69

10.4

.73

21.5

1.6

28.1

2.1

Amps

480V

.33

.55

1.2

.14

2.6

.18

2.8

.2

5.7

.42

7.6

.58

VA

151

24

528

60

1152

83

1248

87

2580

191

3360

255

Watts

69.5

6

169

12.9

230

18.4

262

18.8

464

38.8

608

44

Vars

134

23

500

57.9

1129

81.5

1220

84.8

2538

185

3325

246

PF

.46

.25

.32

.26

.20

.19

.21

.22

.18

.25

.18

.25

% Volts

P/U D/O

85

85

85

85

85

85

63

68

65

65

65

65

30 to

50

30 to

50

20 to

45

20 to

45

Millisec

P/U D/O

15 to

30

7 to

15

20 to

40

7 to

15

15 to

25

15 to

25

7 to

15

7 to

15

D-18



THERMAL MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER

SUBSTITUTION

Substituting a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in place of a

Mag-Break ® circuit breaker may require increasing the circuit breaker trip rating to avoid tripping on starting. See Appendix

(Section J) for recommended thermal-magnetic circuit breaker trip ratings.

NEMA

Size

Starter

1,2,3

Standard

Circuit

Breaker

TEC

SELI

TECL

Substitute

THED

SELT

THEDL

Short-Circuit Rating

230V 460V 575V

25

100

100

25

100

100

22

25

100

UL

Listed

(X)

X

X

X

4

5

TEC

SFLI

SFLI

TBC4

SGLI

TBC4

THFK➁

SFLT

TB4➀

TB4

SGLT

TB4

25

100

100

100

100

100

5

100

100

100

100

100

18

25

100

100

65

100

X

X

X

X

X

X

➀ TB4 requires same unit space as TBC4.

➁ Available in 8000-Line MCC only.

TERMINALS FOR FIELD WIRING

Will Accept Wire

➁

AWG/MCM Material Description

STARTER LOAD TERMINALS

Size 1 and 2 Power Block (Draw out)

Size 1 Starter

Size 2 Starter

Size 3 Power Block (Stationary)

Size 3 Starter

Size 4 Power Block (Stationary)

Size 4 Starter

Size 5 Starter

Size 6 Contactor

Control Terminal Boards

Drawout/Stationary

Hi Density Pull-Apart

POWER TERMINAL BOARDS

50 AMP

Size 1 & 2 Type C Wiring and Distribution

Transformers

100 AMP

Size 3 Type C Wiring and Distribution

Transformers

100 AMP

Size 2 Wye-Delta Starters

14-4

12-2

14-8

14-4

6-2/0

8-1/0

6-250

4-3/0

1/0-500

(2) 2/0-500

10 Max.

CU

(2) 12 Max.

CU

14-4

12-2

6-2/0

14-1/0

12-1/0

CU

AL

CU

CU

CU-AL

CU

CU-AL

CU

CU

CU-AL

CU

AL

CU-AL

CU

AL

150 AMP

Size 4 Type C Wiring and Distribution Transformers 4-3/0 CU

D

➁ Conductors #1 and smaller may be rated 60/75°C.

Conductors #0 and larger must be rated 75°C.

Conductors wired directly to OL device terminals must be rated

75°C CU.

D-19

GE 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers Miscellaneous Units

E

E-1



OPERATOR AND METERING PANELS

Unit spaces can be used to provide metering and/or operator’s panels in the motor control center itself. Arrangement and dimensions will vary depending on the quantity and type of the devices required. Normally, fuse blocks, terminal blocks, current and potential transformers, etc., can be mounted on a base within the unit space. Meters, pilot lights, pushbuttons, switches, etc., can be mounted on the door. Suitable locations and adequate space should be provided so that wiring is simplified and there is no interference between door and base mounted components. The following devices are often specified.

• Pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights.

• Ammeters, voltmeters, and other instruments (panel or switchboard type).

• Instrument and transfer switches

• Electronic power meter

• Control relays

• Timing relays (pneumatic, motor-operated, or electronic)

These panels will be UL Labeled providing all the components are UL Listed for use in motor control centers.

RELAY PANELS

Relay panels can be furnished from 1 space unit to 6 space units with full width doors. The amount of vertical space required is generally determined by the number of terminal board points required or relay type used; when in doubt allow for a double vertical row of terminal boards.

These panels will be UL Labeled providing all the components are UL Listed for use in motor control centers.

SINGLE VERTICAL ROW OF T.B.’s

Space Units

Maximum No. of

T.B. Points

Horizontal Width for

Component Mounting

Maximum No. of

Std. 4-Pole Relays

SECTION WIDTH 20”W 24”W 20”W 24”W

1

1 1 /

2

2

2 1 /

2

12

24

30

42

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

6

12

18

24

8

16

24

32

3

3 1 /

2

4

4 1 /

2

5

5 1 /

2

6

48

60

72

78

90

96

108

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

11 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

14 1 /

2

”

36

42

48

54

60

66

72

48

56

64

72

80

88

96

DOUBLE VERTICAL ROW OF T.B.’s

Maximum No. of

T.B. Points

24

48

60

84

Horizontal Width for

Component Mounting

Maximum No of

Std. 4-Pole Relays

20”W 24”W 20”W 24”W

6”

6”

6”

6”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

9

12

3

6

12

16

4

8

96

120

144

156

180

192

216

6”

6”

6”

6”

6”

6”

6”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

7 1 /

2

”

18

21

24

27

30

33

36

24

28

32

36

40

44

48

ALTERNATOR RELAY PANELS

Consists of two motor alternator circuit using two control relays and a latching relay. Requires minimum 1 space unit height.

E-2



LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

The following panelboards are available for mounting in motor control centers. Type AL and AQ Panelboards with main circuit breakers are normally provided. Type AE and AD panels require a feeder unit for the main CB, which then feeds the M.L.O.

panel.

MCC SPACE UNITS

Number of Circuits

Panel Main Bus

Rating (Amps)

Space Units

➂

AL, AQ

Panel

Type

A

Series

Type

AL

System

Voltage

(Maximum)

120/240

VAC

Type

THQL

THQL

THHQL

THHQL

TXQL

Branch

Poles

➀

1

2

1

2

1,2

Ampere

Rating

15-70

15-100

15-70

15-125

15-30

Interrupting

Rating ➁ RMS

SymmetricalAmps

(in thousands)

10

10

22

22

65

24

24

30

30

12

12

18

18

36

36

42

42

100

225

100

225

225

400

225

400

225

400

225

400

3

4

1

/

2

3

1

/

2

5

3

1

/

2

5

2

2

1

/

2

2

1

/

2

2

1

/

2

3

4

1

/

2

240 VAC

AD

Number of Circuits Space Units

➂

A

Series

Type

AQ

A

Series

Type

AE

4 Wire

120/240

VAC

240 VAC

120 VAC

240 VAC

277 VAC

480/277

VAC Max.

THQL

THHQL

THQL

THQB-GF

THQB

THQB

THHQB-GF

THHQB

THHQB

TXQB

THQB

THHQB

TXQB

TEY

TEY

TEY

TEY

2,3

2,3

3

1,2

1

2

1

1

2

1,2

1,2

2,3

3

1

2,3

1

2,3

15-100

15-100

15-30

15-30

15-70

15-100

15-30

15-70

15-100

15-30

15-100

15-100

15-30

15-100

15-100

15-100

15-100

10

22

65

10

10

10

22

22

22

65

10

22

65

65

65

14

14

24

24

30

30

12

12

18

18

36

36

42

42

Panel Main Bus

Rating (Amps)

(X)

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

225

100

225

2 1 /

2

3

3

3 1 /

2

3

3 1 /

2

3 1 /

2

4

4

4 1 /

2

4

4 1 /

2

Space

Units

➂

AE

3

3

1

/

2

3

4

3

1

/

2

4

2

2

2

1

/

2

2

1

/

2

2

1

/

2

3

1

/

2

UL

Listed

(X)

➂ One space unit (X) equals 12-inch vertical height.

M.L.O. panel does not include feeder space requirements. (see pg.

C-5)

UL

Listed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

A

Series

Type

AD

3 Wire

277 VAC

480 VAC

600 VAC

TED

TED4

THED

TED4

TED4,6

THED4

THED4

THED6

TED6

THED6

2

3

2

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

15-100

15-50

15-30

15-100

15-150

15-100

110-150

15-150

15-150

15-150

14

14

65

14

14

25

25

25

14

18

➀ Two-pole THED breakers require a 3-pole space.

➁ Equipment rating is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any circuit breaker installed.

NOTES:

Branch devices are plug-in for Type AL and bolt-on for AQ, AE and AD panelboards. Maximum of 42 circuits per panel.

The unit rating is the same as the lighting panel rating when:

A. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit but not connected to any power source within the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating. The lighting panel must have a main breaker.

B. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected directly (with no intermediate transformer) to motor control center bus through a feeder. The panel series rating must equal or exceed motor control center short-circuit rating.

C. The lighting panel is mounted as a separate motor control center unit and factory connected to a transformer unit in the motor control center. This does not reduce or affect motor control center short-circuit rating.

Ground fault CB not available in AL panels.

Lighting panel main bus is rated 1000 amps per square inch, alternate

800 amps per square inch is available.

E

E-3



DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

GENERAL

Open, dry-type transformers with primary thermal-magnetic circuit breaker or fusible switch with NEMA Class R (dual element) fuses are available in motor control center construction.

The accompanying tables give both single- and three-phase transformers normally mounted in motor control centers for use in supplying separate-source control circuits, panelboards, and power external to the motor control center.

Space units shown includes space necessary for the primary disconnect. One space unit equals 12 inches of vertical height. If transformers with taps are required, refer to the factory.

Primary disconnects rated 225-amperes and less stab into the vertical bus. Higher ratings use bolted connections.

Transformer secondary conductors are wired to a terminal board in the unit. One leg of 120-volt secondaries, the center point of

120/240-volt secondaries, and the Y-point of 3-phase secondaries are grounded unless otherwise specified.

NEC Article 450-3 covers transformer protection, other than motor control circuit transformers or special applications. The general requirements are:

Primary Protection Only

Primary Current

9 amps or more

2 amps to 9 amps

Less than 2 amps

Primary Protection Rating

125% or next higher standard rating per NEC Sect. 240-6

167% maximum

300% maximum

Primary and Secondary Protection

Secondary Current

9 amps or more

Less than 9 amps

Primary Prot. Rating

250% maximum

250% maximum

Sec. Prot. Rating

125% or next higher standard rating

167% maximum

The degree of protection required depends on the specific application. Select a transformer protective device which provides the required protection. Secondary protection in each ungrounded conductor can be provided if specified.

THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS (DELTA-Y)

FUSED SWITCH–100kA IC

KVA Switch Size Fuse Amps Space Unit UL Listed

➃

(X)

380-120/208 VOLTS, 50 HERTZ

30

45

3

9

30

30

60

200

7

17.5

60

90

6

6

2.5

3

480-120/208 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

15

30

3

9

45

30

30

30

60

200

5.6

15

25

45

70

600-120/208 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

3

6

2.5

3

6

30

45

3

9

30

30

60

60

4.5

12

40

60

6

6

2.5

3

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀➁

➂

➀➁

➂

25

IC Rating (kA)

100

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

➀➁

➂

➀ Requires full depth of motor control center. Units cannot be mounted below or behind transformer.

➁ Requires 24-inch wide enclosure.

➂ Requires 20-inch deep enclosure 24-inch wide. Units cannot be mounted below or behind transformer.

➃ Sized for primary protection only. (Dual element fuses)

➄ Sized for primary and secondary protection.

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

SEP

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

SEP

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

CIRCUIT BREAKER

CB Trip

➄

30

70

150

20

30

70

125

20

70

100

Space Unit UL Listed

(X)

3

6

6

6

6

3

3

3

6

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀➁

➂

➀➁

➂

➀➁

➂

E-4



SINGLE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS

FUSED SWITCH–100KA IC

KVA Switch Size Fuse Amps Space Unit UL Listed

➃

(X)

240-120/240 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

0.50

1

3

5

10

15

25

37.5

30

30

30

30

60

200

200

200

60

80

150

200

15

30

3.2

7

380-120/240 VOLTS, 50 HERTZ

4

6

2

4

1

1

1.5

2

0.50

1

3

10

15

25

37.5

0.50

1

3

10

15

25

37.5

30

30

30

60

60

200

200

12

35

3.5

4

50

90

125

480-120/240 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

1

1

1.5

2

2.5

4

6

0.50

1

3

5

10

15

25

37.5

30

30

30

30

30

60

200

200

25

40

70

100

10

12

2.8

3.5

600-120/240 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

1

1

1.5

2

4

6

2

2.5

30

30

30

30

60

60

200

8

20

2.5

4

35

60

80

1

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

6

➅ Requires 20” deep enclosure.

➆ Delete 1SU for 65KAIC and below. (100A SW.)

➇ Add 1

/

2 space unit.

➈ Add 1 space unit.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀

➀➅➆

➀➅

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅➆

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅➆

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➂

Miscellaneous Units

25

IC Rating (kA)

100

CIRCUIT BREAKER

CB Trip

➄

Space Unit UL Listed

(X)

THED

THED

THED

THED

THFK

THFK

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THED

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

SEP➇

SFP➈

SFP➈

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

SEP➇

SEP➇

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

SEP➇

SEP➇

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

THEDL

30

40

70

150

225

225

15

50

90

150

125

15

20

40

50

125

125

40

50

100

90

1.5

2

2

2.5

3

6

1.5

2

2

3.5

3

6

1.5

2

2.5

3

6

2

2.5

3

6

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➂

➀

➀➅

➀➅

➂

E

E-5



POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

DESCRIPTION

Motors and other inductive loads require two kinds of electrical current: Current which performs the actual work and reactive current which produces the magnetic fields necessary for the operation of inductive devices such as motors. Both types of currents produce system I 2 R losses. Capacitors installed near inductive loads can be used to reduce the reactive currents which flow through much of the system, thereby reducing I 2 R losses.

Low-voltage capacitors are generally three-phase units, deltaconnected, and are protected by current limiting fuses. The fuses disconnect the capacitor in the event of an electrical short, providing service continuity for the system and reducing the possibility of rupturing the capacitor case.

Power factor correction capacitors should be switched by a separate contactor (sketch d) under any of the following conditions:

• High inertia load.

• Open circuit transition reduced voltage starting.

• Wye-delta motor.

• Reversing or frequently jogged motor.

• Multispeed motor (2SIW, 2S2W, etc.).

Power factor correction capacitors should not be connected to the load side of solid state starters and drives. It should be noted that two-speed motor starters require separate contactors to switch in capacitors after a time-delay in order to avoid possible motor damage while the capacitors discharge. For the same reason, Wye-Delta starters have the capacitors applied after the delta connection has been made.

CAPACITORS SWITCHED WITH THE MOTOR

Capacitors used for power factor correction should be selected using the motor manufacturer’s application data.

When the capacitor is connected ahead of the overload relay

(sketch a, c, or d), the overload current elements should be selected using the full-load motor current and service factor values specified on the nameplate of the motor. When the capacitor is connected on the load side of the overload heaters (sketch b), lower rated heaters are required, since the overload relay in this case will respond to the vector sum of the motor and capacitor currents. Capacitors must not exceed the maximum KVAR recommended by the motor manufacturer for switching with the specific motor selected. The Capacitor Department, Hudson

Falls, NY, has published tables showing maximum capacitance and percent ampere reduction for specific GE motors.

Disconnect means—

Short circuit protective means—

Contactor—

Overload relay—

Motor—

Capacitor— a b c d

E-6



SELECTION OF POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION CAPACITORS

The following table is provided as a guide. Consult motor manufacturer for actual capacitor KVAR values.

Typical Capacitor Ratings

➀

Horsepower

Rating

40

50

60

75

15

20

25

30

3

5

7 1 /

2

10

9

11

15

15

4

5

6

7

1

/

2

High Efficiency and Older Design

(Pre “T-Frame”)

Capacitor

KVAR

Current

Reduction %

1 1 /

2

2

2 1 /

2

3

15

13

12

11

10

10

10

10

9

9

9

8

“T Frame” NEMA

Design “B” Motors

Capacitor

KVAR

Current

Reduction %

3

4

1 1 /

2

2 1 /

2

23

22

20

18

5

6

7

1

/

2

8

15

17 1 /

2

20

25

18

17

17

16

17

15

15

14

100

125

150

200

20

27

1

/

2

30

37

1

/

2

8

8

8

8

30

35

40

50

➀

For use with 1800 rpm, 3-phase, 60 Hz classification B motors, to raise full-load power factor to approximately 95 percent.

14

12

12

11

MCC Space

Units Required

1X

1 1 /

2

X

240V

Maximum KVAR

480V

1

1

/

2 thru 4

6, 8, 11, 12

5, 7

1

/

2

, 9, 10

15 thru 22 1 /

2

20

50

600V

20

45

UL Listed

(X)

X

X

One space unit X equals 12 inches of vertical height. Space required is for capacitor only. Add space for switching device as needed.

In front-mounted configurations utilizing the 20-inch deep enclosure, capacitors may be mounted in the rear 10 inches of space behind the vertical bus. Rear access to the motor control center is required for servicing the capacitors.

Optional 240- and 480-volt blown fuse indicating lights are available. Visible through unit door.

SWITCHING CAPACITORS SEPARATELY

When a group of motors are so operated that some run while others are idle, a single capacitor bank (containing a number of individual units) can be connected to the motor control center bus to supply kilovars to the group. In these instances, a separate switching device is needed for the capacitors. The interrupting rating of the switching device should be at least as great as the short-circuit current available. Cable must be capable of at least 135 percent rated capacitor current. Switching device selections in the following tabulation are based on the continuous current of the capacitors.

• Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers ..........................135%

• Fuses and Fusible Switches.......................................165%

• Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ...................................150%

Recommended Switching Device

KVAR

Switch with

Class J

(In Amperes)

Molded Case

Circuit Breaker

(In Amperes)

240 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

2 1 /

2

5

7 1 /

2

10

15

20

27 1 /

2

30

37 1 /

2

480 VOLTS, 60 HERTZ

10

15

5

7 1 /

2

20

25

27 1 /

2

30

37 1 /

2

50

60

60

80

10

15

20

30

40

80

125

125

175

10

20

30

40

60

50

50

60

70

15

15

20

30

40

80

100

110

150

15

20

30

40

60

E

E-7

GE 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers Programmable Logic Control PLC

F

F-1



GENERAL

GE Fanuc Automation - Charlottesville, VA, has continually updated/improved its PLC products, which are mounted and wired in the Motor Control Center.

The Series Six PLC was the first in a succession of developments that established GE Fanuc in the marketplace. The Series

Six was the first PLC to employ the family concept. Other industry firsts include the Workmaster, the first IBM-based programmer; the

Series One, the first modular small PLC; Genius, the first distributed, intelligent I/O system; and the first embedded MAP 3.0 interface in a PLC. GE Fanuc’s newest line of PLCs, the Series 90-70 family, is the first PLC with truly open architecture. Thanks to the

VME bus back plane, many third party specialty modules are available to enhance the functionality of the Series 90-70.

GE Fanuc was one of the first companies in the United States to attain ESO 9001 registration from UL, CSA and BSI. This means that GE Fanuc has met the most comprehensive quality standard in the design, manufacturing and service of its products. Many of the

PLC packages have UL, CSA, and FM recognition.

SERIES 90-70

The 90-70 system has the most capability in the Series 90 family and is used for system PLCs as well as process lineups of MCC’s.

It has a wide range of input and output modules as well as extensive communication capabilities. With the GE Fanuc authorized third party VME modules, the Series 90-70 is exceptionally versatile

(including imbedded PCs, harddrives, motion control, etc.). The

90-70 is positioned to eventually supercede the Series Six Plus.

FIELD CONTROL

Modular design gives you more choices. Each field control station consists of a bus interface unit or BIU, an optional field control processor for local logic, up to four field terminal bases, and as many as eight field I/O modules. With field control, you can design a system that meets the precise needs of your application–and upgrade it easily as your application needs change.

MICRO SERIES

8 Input 6 Outputs

16 Input 12 Outputs

85–265 VAC

GENIUS I/O SYSTEM

A system of inherently distributed inputs and outputs, which consists of:

• Genius I/O Blocks (mounted at the point of control).

Input and outputs: AC, DC, isolated, analog, counter.

Special Power Management Module

• Bus Controller (which serves as the interface between the genius system and the Series Six or Series 90 PLC or other industrial controllers)

• Hand Held Monitor (the portable diagnostic and configuration tool) used for trouble-shooting, monitoring, scaling and configuring the I/O Blocks.

• Genius Bus which provides communications between the bus controller, hand held monitor, and up to 30 I/O

Blocks over a single shielded twisted wire pair.

• Genius Local Area Network can communicate between computers, PLCs, and genius blocks up to 7500 ft. using a single twisted pair.

Genius I/O Blocks are mounted, wired, and configured by the factory, and provide superior, built-in diagnostics which detect open circuits, short circuits, overloads, and a variety of other malfunctions which are beyond the power of conventional PLCs to detect.

SERIES 90-30

A versatile unit, the 90-30 is a small PLC with extended capabilities. It is used for MCC lineup sequencing, similar to the Series

One PLC. However, with the capability of 512 I/O points, analog

I/O, coprocessor modules, and genius communication, it approaches the definition of a larger PLC.

• Inputs AC or DC (common), analog, high speed counter.

• Outputs AC, DC, (Relay, Common, Isolated), analog display (special module). The isolated AC outputs have been tested with Size 1-4 starters for MCC use.

• Special Motion control, high speed counter, third party modules

F-2



I/O CIRCUITS

SAMPLE INPUT CIRCUIT - 120 VOLT AC INPUT MODULE (90-30)

MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

Rated Voltage

Inputs per Module

Isolation

Input Current

Input Characteristics:

Max. On-state

Min. Off-state

Min. On-state

Max. Off-state

On response time

Off response time

120 Volts AC

16 (1 group with a single common)

1500 volts RMS between field side and logic side

14.5 mA (typical) at rated voltage

74 volts to 132 volts

0 to 20 volts

6 mA maximum

2.2 mA maximum

30 ms maximum

45 ms maximum

SAMPLE OUTPUT CIRCUIT - 120/240 VOLT ISOLATED AC OUTPUT MODULE (90-30)

MODULE CIRCUITRY TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

Rated Voltage

Output Voltage Range

Outputs per Module

Isolation

Output Current (Max.)

120/240 VAC

85 to 264 VAC

5 (each output isolated)

1500 volts RMS between field side and logic side

500 volts RMS between each output

2 amps per point,

5 amps per module

Output Characteristics:

Inrush Current

Min. Load Current

25 amps maximum for one cycle

100 mA

Output Voltage Drop 1.5 volts maximum

Output Leakage Current3 mA maximum at 120 VAC

6 mA maximum at 240 VAC

On response time

Off response time

1 ms maximum

9 ms maximum (

1

/

2 cycle)

F

I/O CONFIGURATIONS

Standard I/O for motor control center consists of grouped input cards and isolated output cards (note that the isolated outputs can control all standard motor control center starters).

F-3



SERIES 90

™

-30 PLC MCC SPACE REQUIREMENTS

12-inch per rack plus a 6-inch minimum space for a local CPT and fuses. A 10 slot rack requires a 24-inch wide section for wireway space.

MODEL 311

The entry level Series 90-30 PLC, Model 311, is available in either a five or ten I/O slot version. With the CPU built into the backplane, the Model

311 provides an “extra” slot for additional I/O or intelligent modules.

Model 311 offers 512 words of register memory and 3K of logic memory.

This unit provides all the features you want with a small programmable controller.

MODEL 331

For applications requiring additional I/O the Model 331 can handle your needs. It is expandable to five racks to provide the user with 49 available slots for discrete, analog or intelligent I/O. It offers up to 512 I/O points,

2K words of register memory and 8K words of logic memory.

SERIES 90-30 GENERAL

SPECIFICATIONS

MODEL 311

I/O Points (Maximum)

Logic Memory

(Words)

CMOS RAM

PROM

EEPROM

Execution Speed (1K)

Internal Functions

Password Protection

Output Coils

Internal Coils

Timers/Counters

Shift Registers

Data Registers

High Speed Counter

80KHz

Analog I/O (12 Bit)

Programmable Coprocessor Module

Genius Communications

Programming

Languages

Relay Ladder

Statement List

Advanced Data Operations

Devices

Hand Held Programmer

Workmaster or IBM compatible

160

3K

3K

3K

18msec

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

512

1024

170

Yes

512

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Built-in CPU

Racks

5 slot

10 slot

Operating Environment: 0 to 60° C

MODEL 331

512

8K

8K

8K

0.4msec

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

512

1024

>500

Yes

2048

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Module

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

5-95% non-condensing humidity

The Series 90-30 PLC has dimensions similar to the older

Series One PLC. It is available in two forms: the model 311 has a basic five slot rack, or a ten slot rack when the I/O requirements exceed the five slot rack capabilities. The model 331 is available with a five or ten slot base rack (CPU plus I/O modules), which then can be expanded to a total of five racks for additional I/O capabilities. With the built-in coprocessor and calendar clock, the Model 331 has faster execution times and can be used with time-of-day programs. The programs are stored in batterybacked CMOS RAM (EPROM chips are available).

The PLC can be programmed form the hand-held programmer, or PC's with LM90 software

Types of I/O Modules

IC693MDL390: 120 VAC, 5PT. ISO. OUT.*

IC693MDL930: Relay Out. 6PT. ISO.4A

IC693MDL940: Relay Output, 2A MOD. (16)

IC693ALG220: Analog Input, E/I, MOD (4)

IC693ALG390: Analog Output, E MOD. (2)

IC693PCM300: Prog. Copress. Comm. Mod.

IC693CMM301: Genius Comm. Mod

IC693PRG300: Hand Held Programmer

* Isolated output points have been tested with GE contactors and will energize size 1 through 4 without interposing relays.

F-4



SERIES 90

™

-70 PLC

GENERAL

The Series 90-70 CPU contains an INTEL-base microprocessor and a GE Fanuc-designed Boolean coprocessor for high speed response. It is designed for system level control, and will communicate with other PLCs thru the CCM Protocol, GE net or the Genius

LAN. Since it uses the VME standard, many intelligent modules can be added to the rack, thus increasing its versatility. The 90-30 instruction set is a subset or the 90-70s to allow commonality in programming. Built into the CPU is an alarm processor which records and time stamps any faults. This could allow the master program to perform corrective action routines when required.

SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature

AC Power Required

Frequency

Maximum Load

Battery Type

(to retain CMOS memory) load

0° to 60° C

5% to 95% humidity

(non-condensing)

120/240 VAC (-25%, +10%)

47 to 63 Hz

100 Watts

Lithium

6 month retention under

Programmer

Terminal Board

8-10 year shelf life (no load)

Workmaster or IBM PC

Removable 40 point

(1 #14AWG or 2 #16AWG)

MCC SPACE REQUIREMENTS

9 slot rack – 2 S.U., 24 in. W

5 slot rack – 2 S.U., 20 in. W

No vertical bus behind these PLCs. Interposing TB and smaller wire should be considered due to module density.

F

F-5



APPLICATION

Series 90-70 PLCs can be coordinated with motor control centers to form a complete, integrated system for material handling, transportation, water treatment, power generation, and many other continuous or batch process applications. From performing simple functions such as start/stop or sequencing operations to comprehensive system monitoring and feed back loops, Series 90-

70 control is a powerful addition to MCCs for medium to large applications.

CPU AND I/O OPTIONS

CPU

User Memory (K words)

Discrete I/O Addressing

Analog I/O addressing

Boolean Execution

Processor

Floating Point

Coprocessor

731/732

16

512

8K

0.4 msec/K

80186

No/Yes

771/772

32,64,128,256

2K

8K

0.4 msec/K

80186

No/Yes

781/782

64,128

12K

8K

0.4 msec/K

80386

No/Yes

Input Modules

16 Ckt, 120V AC Isolated Input

16 Ckt, 240V AC Isolated Input

32 Ckt, 120V AC Input

32 Ckt, 24V DC Pos Logic Input

32 Ckt, TTL Neg Logic Input

32 Ckt, 12V DC +/- Logic Input



8 Ckt, Analog Volt/Curr Input

16 Ckt, Analog Current Input Expander

16 Ckt, Analog Voltage Input Expander

Output Modules

16 Ckt, 120V AC 2A Output

16 Ckt, 120/240V AC Isolated Output*

32 Ckt, 120V AC 0.5A Output

16 Ckt, 24/48V DC 2A Pos Logic Output

32 Ckt, 24/48V DC 0.5A Pos Logic Output

32 Ckt, 12V DC 0.5A Pos Logic Output

32 Ckt, 5-48V DC 0.5A Neg Logic Output

16 Ckt, Signal Relay 2A Output

4 Ckt, Analog Volt/Current Output

Specialty Modules

Genius Bus Controller

Programmable Coprocessor

Graphics Display Coprocessor

GEnet MAP Carrierband

GEnet MAP Broadband

MODBUS Interface

MMS Ethernet

* Capable of energizing GE size 1 through size 4 starters without interposing relays.

F-6



GE Fanuc Field Control

GENERAL

With Field Control, GE Fanuc engineers have refined proven technology to create a truly modular system for decentralized I/O and control. Each station of a Field Control network can act as a stand-alone controller, allowing for physical separation of logical control functions and faster processing times. As a result, Field

Control is an ideal complement for the Series 90 PLC and Genius

I/O a single low-cost solution for a variety of application needs.

A Local Solution to a Field Logic

By providing simple logic solving at the local station, Field

Control produces shaarp increases in a system's raw speed and effieiency. Future versions of Field Control will accommodate additional programming options to build on these advances.

Iinitially, users will be able to program a Field Control station using standard GE Fanuc Logicmaster™ programming soltware used on Series 90-30 and Series 90-20 PLCs. In the future, they will be able to choose a programming language of their choice.

With Field Control, GE Fanuc engineers have created a single device that can accept field wiring and condition the signal for input to or output from the control system. There is no need for accessory terminal blocks installed solely to connect field devices with I/O. Designed to be installed and wired like a field terminal block, Field Control can reduce connections by up to one-holf.

The One Choice for Both Local Panel

Control and Decentralized I/O

Currently, control specifiers must purchase one I/O platform for local panels and a different platform for decentralized I/O. Field

Control is an open platform, equally at home in both applications.

Using the Genius bus and other available fieldbuses or communication options, Field Control provides an extremely cost-effective, space-saving option in both local panels and decentralized panel applications.

Open Architecture Provides the Solution for

Diverse Applications

GE Fanuc embraces open architecture for two reasons. It helps our customers make the most of their existing investment in industrial automation. And it enables them to take advantage of new products as they are developed.

To address the diverse needs of all our customers, GE Fanuc will be opening the field processor component to third-party partners to develop additional fieldbus interfaces. In addition, I/O protocol has been published, and we will be encouraging the development of third-party I/Os and accessories.

Description

Bus Interface

Units:

Genius BIU, 24 VDC Power

FIP BIU 24 VDC Power

Field Terminal

Bases:

I/O Base, Barrier Style, accommodates 2 modules

I/O Base, Box style, accommodates 2 modules

High Density Connector Base, accommodates 2 modules

Aux. Terminal Block, Qty. 2 Barrier Style

Aux. Terminal Block, Qty. 2 Box Style

21" I/O Base Expansion Cable (only 1 per person)

Field Processors: Micro Field Processor

Field I/O Modules: 24 VDC Pos./Neg. Input 16 Pt. Grouped

12/24 VDC 0.5A Pos. Output 16 Pt. Grouped

Analog Input Current 8 Pt. Grouped

Analog Output Current/Voltage 4 Pt. Grouped

48 VDC Pos./Neg. Input 16 Pt. Grouped

120 VAC Input 16 Pt. Grouped

240 VAC Input 16 Pt. Grouped

120 VAC 2A Output 8 Pt. Grouped

12-120VAC Output 16 Pt. Grouped

Relay 2A 8 Pt. 6 Form A/2 Form C Isolated

125 VDC Input 16 Pt. Grouped

Analog Input Current 16 Pt. Grouped

Analog Output Current 8 Pt. Grouped

Thermocouple 8 Pt. Isolated

RTD 4 Channel Isolated - 3 wire

F

F-7



GENIUS

®

I/O SYSTEM

General

The Genius I/O, a system of inherently distributed inputs and outputs, is designed to interface to any number of industrial controllers, including GE Fanuc PLCs, and third party CPUs. It can be used as the only I/O on a System or it can be mixed with the present rack-type I/O. Genius represents a complete rethinking of the role of I/O in industrial control. Genius Blocks are UL, CSA, FM and

CSA hazardous environment approved. The Genius I/O system was made possible through two key General Electric technological innovations:

Smart Switch: A device with the built-in current and voltage sensors required for the extensive diagnostics available with

Genius I/O. The smart switch allows detection of faults not only within the programmable controller I/O system, but also faults in the coils and other actuator devices under the control of the programmable controller, as well as the signal path from pushbuttons and other input devices. No other technology provides this level of fault detection.

Communications Controller: A token bus local area network controller which allows Genius I/O devices to communicate over a single-shielded twisted wire pair, rather than via bundles of point-to-point wires required in conventional systems.

GENIUS I/O SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A simplified block diagram of the Genius I/O System is shown in

Figure 2. The PLC, CPU, and I/O rack shown are standard Series

90-70 units. The Genius serial bus connects I/O Blocks with a single shielded twisted pair up to 7500 feet from the Bus Controller.

Genius I/O Block

A microprocessor-based, configurable, ruggedized solid state device to which field I/O devices are attached. Measuring approximately 9” x 4” x 3”, I/O Blocks can be mounted virtually anywhere, such as in a draw-out unit of a motor control center or pushbutton station where it is common to have one input and one output per motor circuit. No separate rack or power supply is required. Field wiring is attached to a terminal assembly which separates from the removable electronics assembly. Thus, field wiring need not be disturbed to service the electronics. Due to the microprocessor and intelligent switching, inputs and outputs may be mixed arbitrarily on blocks. There are no dip switches nor replaceable fuses.

An EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only

Memory) is located within the terminal assembly. The EEPROM stores all user-selectable options and retains these selections even during POWER OFF conditions. It can be read by the electronics assembly at any time and altered by commands from either the

CPU or the Hand Held Monitor. The EEPROM is the only electronic device in the terminal assembly and has a long Mean-Time-

Between-Failure (MTBF).

Typical Genius I/O Unit

F-8



Genius I/O Block (Cont’d)

The electronics assembly contains the power supply, communications chip, microprocessor, smart switches, and other electronic components required to perform Genius I/O functions.

Each I/O Block is keyed to prevent the insertion of a non-matching electronics assembly into a terminal assembly wired for a different power. Once inserted, the electronics assembly automatically reads the content of the EEPROM and initializes itself to match the configuration originally established for the I/O Block in that position.

Table 1 lists the types of I/O Blocks currently available, as well as other basic system components.

Table 1—Genius I/O Components

Block

Function

AC I/O

AC/DC I/O

DC I/O

DC I/O

AC Analog

DC Analog

Nominal Voltage

115 VAC, Grouped combination input and output

115 VAC/125 VDC

Isolated combination input and output

4 groups of 2

24-48 VDC Source combination input and output

24/48 VDC Sink combination input and output

Analog 115 VDC

Powered

Analog 24/48 VDC

Powered

Other Components

Hand Held Monitor

Metering

Bus Controller

Bus Controller

Power Trac

Block

Working

Voltage

93-132 VAC

47-63 Hz

93-132 VAC

47-63 Hz

105-140 VDC

18-50 VDC

18-50 VDC

93-132 VAC

47-63 Hz

18-50 VDC

93-132 VAC

47-63 Hz or

185-265 VAC

47-63 Hz

With Diagnostics

Without Diagnostics

93-132 VAC

105-140 VDC

No. of

Circuits

8 (1 x 8)

16 (1 x 16)

8 (4 x 2)

16 (1 x 16)

16 (1 x 16)

4 In/2 Out

4 In/2 Out

120V-PT

5A-CT

MCC Space Requirements

Allow 18-inch height for the first two blocks, plus 12 inches for each additional set of two. This allows room for 120-volt power supply disconnect (or CPT). Maximum of 8 blocks per section, without ventilation.

Hand Held Monitor (HHM)

A portable diagnostic and configuration tool used for addressing, trouble-shooting, monitoring, scaling and configuring the I/O

Blocks. The HHM plugs directly into any block or into the programmable controller, or it can be attached to any location on the twisted pair communications link. It is supplied in a case suitable for you to attach to your belt, or it can be panel mounted using the mounting bezel included with each HHM. It has an alphanumeric

LCD display (4 lines x 16 characters) with microprocessor-driven prompts available in English, German, French, or Italian. A key feature of the HHM is its ability to manually perform functions and force discrete and analog I/O, whether or not there is a programmable controller connected to the system. This greatly facilitates system check-out prior to full-scale operation.

The HHM includes:

–An LCD display capable of displaying 16 characters per line on four separate lines.

–Four display-labeled soft keys.

–A decimal keypad, including sign and decimal point keys.

–Four fixed-function keys.

Fig. 4. Hand Held Monitor

F-9



GENIUS

®

I/O SYSTEM

SERIES SIX BUS CONTROLLER

The Bus Controller serves as the interface between the Genius

I/O systems and the industrial controller.

Bus Controllers are available for Series 90-70, Series 90-30 (for communications), Series Six PLCs, personal computers, DCSs,

Industrial Robots, GE Drive Systems, and others.

Genius I/O Bus

To connect Genius I/O elements together is a 150 kbit/sec serial token passing bus communications link formed by daisy-chain connection of twisted pair wire. It has high noise immunity (1500 volt common mode) and its operation is not affected by any block attachment, removal or failure. Each data bit is triply encoded for data integrity; error detection is further improved via cyclical redundancy check (CRC). Bus errors are reported automatically.

This link requires only one pair and can be Belden type 9302 (or factory approved equivalent) up to 100 feet (30 meters) in total length, or must be Belden type 9182 or Alpha type 9823 (or factory approved equivalent) up to 7500 feet (2258 meters). Belden type

9182 or equivalent is used in motor control center equipment.

TABLE 2—Genius I/O Diagnostic Features

Block

–Addition of Block

–Loss of Block

(incl. Communications

Power, Memory Losses)

–Address Conflict

–Bus Error

–Bus Controller OK

Input

–Open Wire

–Power Loss➀

–Over Temp.

–Open Wire➁

–Underrange

–Overrange

–Hi Alarm

–Low Alarm

Discrete Point

Output

–Failed Switch

–Load not present

–Overload

–Short Circuit

–Over Temp.

–Power Loss➀

Analog I/O

–Underrange

–Overrange

➀ Isolated only.

➁ 1-5 volt DC (4-20mA DC) range only.

Diagnostics

The Genius I/O system provides advanced diagnostic capability. Error detection for discrete and analog circuits is summarized in

Table 2. Such detection includes a variety of block failure modes, bus failures and failures within the Bus Controller. Of greater significance, however, is the diagnostic power for the attached I/O devices. On discrete blocks, the system detects open wires, short circuits, overloads, and a variety of other malfunctions which are beyond the power of conventional programmable controllers to detect. Many faults may be detected before they cause a malfunction in equipment. The Genius I/O can detect the integrity of a control circuit before the circuit must actually be energized by periodic

“pulse-testing” under microprocessor control within a Genius I/O

Block. Over temperature sensors are also built into each circuit.

On the analog blocks, the Genius I/O can detect an input open wire, mix high-level analog signals on one I/O Block (±10 volts DC,

±5 volts DC, 0-10 volts DC, 0-5 volts DC, 1-5 volts DC, or 4-20 mA), establish linear conversions from analog values to engineering units, process high-level and low-level alarms, and detect overrange and underrange analog signals. Analog blocks also allow you to establish different filter delays on inputs: short filter delays

(5-10 msec) for fast system response in controlled low-noise environment or longer filter delays (20-1000 msec) to reject electrical noise in harsh environments. All of these faults are automatically reported to the HHM or CPU.

GENIUS

LAN

SERIES 90-30

SERIES 90-70 MICRO 90 SERIES SIX

DEC and MicroVAX are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.

F-10

GENIUS I/O



CONNECTIONS

PLC CONTROLLED STARTERS

A combination motor starter will require a minimum of one

INPUT and one OUTPUT per starter. As shown in Figure 5, the

OUTPUT is connected between the starter coil and the fused, ungrounded leg of the control voltage source (terminals 3, 1). The

INPUT connection is made between the starter “Seal contact” and the grounded leg of the control voltage source (Terminals 2, X

2

).

The INPUT monitors the status of the seal circuit to independently verify that the starter has closed.

Fig. 5. INPUT and OUTPUT Connection

When an H-O-A switch is used with PLC I/O, the configuration will appear as shown in Figure 6. Note: as mentioned previously, the INPUT monitors the status of the starter’s seal circuit in the manual mode as well as the PLC (automatic) mode.

OPTIONAL INPUTS/DIAGNOSTIC

Additional INPUT connections can be made to monitor the specific status of combination starters and feeders to provide further diagnostic information to the process operator and maintenance personnel.

1. The status of the overload relay can be monitored. An electrically-isolated, normally-open auxiliary contact can be ordered with the GE 300-Line overload relay and an additional PLC INPUT can be wired in series with it.

2. A PLC INPUT can be connected between terminals 1 and X2 to monitor the availability of control power to the starter unit.

STARTER UNITS WITH SEPARATE-SOURCE

CONTROL VOLTAGE

INPUT and OUTPUT connections are shown below (see Figure

7) for units arranged for separate-source control.

INPUT– A common (non-isolated) INPUT can be used if all X2 terminals are wired together.

OUTPUT– As required by NEC Article 430-74, if a disconnect auxiliary contact and/or control circuit fuse (FU) is included with each starter, then the OUTPUT must be the isolated type. However, if the auxiliary contact and fuse are omitted, a common OUTPUT module can be used. With common output modules, interposing relays are required with NEMA Size 3 and 4 starters.

Note: NEC article 430-74 can be met with GE’s standard split-type control terminal boards on all draw-out units, or with GE’s pull-apart terminal boards.

Fig. 7. INPUT and OUTPUT Connections for Separate-Source Control

Fig. 6. H-O-A Connection

STARTER UNITS WITH INDIVIDUAL

CONTROL TRANSFORMERS

For starters having individual control power transformers all

OUT-PUTs must be isolated type. This requirement is necessary due to the separate voltage sources provided by the individual control transformers. INPUTs may be either isolated or non-isolated types. Where non-isolated INPUTs are used all X

2 be wired together.

terminals must

SURGE SUPPRESSORS

In cases where excessive noise is present on the control line or hard interlocks which will operate often (in series with PLC OUT-

PUT), surge suppressors are recommended.

ISOLATED VERSUS NON-ISOLATED OUPUTS

Isolated Outputs

GE’s isolated OUTPUTS can be used for direct control of NEMA

Size 1 through 4 combination starters without the use of an interposing relay. The contactors of GE’s standard NEMA Size 5 and larger starters are operated at line voltage with interposing relays operated from the secondary of the control transformer.

Non-isolated OUTPUTS

NEMA Size 1-2 starters may be operated directly from common

PLC OUTPUT cards. The continuous current rating of GE’s non-isolated OUTPUT module requires an interposing relay for NEMA Size

3 and larger starters. Check the module ratings for inrush and continuous values.

F-11


Motor Control Centers Solid State Drives & Starters

G-1

G



ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES

GENERAL

As a vehicle for controlling multiple motor functions, the Motor

Control Center has become the logical place to mount variable speed drives. However, the application of these drives is not a simple selection process, and the following is an explanation of some of the variables involved.

A drive must have ventilation. The basic power switching components are transistors, which are mounted on finned heat sinks. Although the drive may be operating at 95% efficiency, the

5% (±) normal heat loss cannot be enclosed in the MCC without exceeding the safe operating temperature (50°C). Standard mounting is ventilated (NEMA 1 or 1A only.)

A drive is electronically controlled. The new generation of PWM drives are all microprocessor based. Although well shielded from stray noise, they require careful wire routing, and in some cases shielded wire runs to avoid “nuisance” problems. Control wires should be run separate from power leads. If they must cross, try to keep them at right angles to minimize the induced fields

(noise).

A drive creates noise on the power system. Although we use reactors to minimize system disturbances, a drive will create harmonics on the power/system (both at the motor and at the transformer). If sensitive computer systems are to be utilized, they should be isolated from the drive’s source. Likewise, the harmonics created at the motor may cause the motor to run hotter than expected. Standard motors should be derated 10% when used with a drive. We recommend GE’s high efficiency ENERGY SAVER ® motors for drive applications. See motor application data, SH. G-3

A drive must have short circuit protection. Since a drive is subjected to higher available short circuit currents in an

MCC, (vs. a wall mounted unit) additional components such as current limiting fuses and reactors are utilized. See typical one line sketch.

A drive can provide significant energy savings. When a fan or pump is utilized on a system with variable flow rates, whether measured in gallons per minute or cubic feet of cooling air per minute, a variable speed drive is the most efficient means of control. Since a variable torque load requires significantly less energy when operated at lower speed, the energy savings can be in the 25 to 50% range when compared to a full voltage motor using dampers or valving to reduce its output. (The amount of savings depends, of course, on the amount of time the motor can be used at the reduced speed.)

LINE REACTORS

The available power source connected to the Drive is not to exceed 500KVA. If the ac power source is greater than 500KVA and the Drives rating (HP) is less than 10% of the power source's

KVA; ac line reactors will have to be installed in L1, L2, and L3 power leads of the Drive.

AF300E$™ Drives

LOAD FILTERS

IGBT drives create voltage spikes at the motor. Motor insulation rating must be higher than these peaks. Motor should meet NEMA MGI part 31. If not, load filters may be required.

Refer to factory for analysis.

G-2



MOTOR APPLICATION DATA

Harmonic Derating

AC motors have traditionally been applied as constant speed motors, so there is little published information on reduced speed efficiencies, especially when operated with a non-sinusoidal supply such as an inverter. The harmonics present in the PWM inverter output increase motor losses and thus motor heating. General

Electric Energy Saver® motors, designed for high efficiency and improved thermal characteristics, may be applied at nameplate rating for variable torque duty, such as centrifugal fans and pumps, for 4 and 6 pole ratings. Standard AC motors designed for 60 Hertz operation should be derated 10% for variable torque duty. For constant torque applications, Energy Saver and standard design motors should be applied per Fig. 1. For other applications refer to the Company.

(1) HP = T X N

5250

Fig. 1

HOW TO SELECT DRIVES

1. Types of Load

In selecting inverters, load patterns of machines should be known in advance. Generally, loads can be categorized into the three types shown below. Estimate or obtain the point marked 0 as indicated. This defines maximum torque and the maximum or minimum speed requirement of the driven equipment. Calculate the required motor HP by substituting the maximum torque and rated motor base speed in equation (1).

HP = Required HP

T = Torque in lb./ft.

N = Speed in RPM

Select the proper motor using the data from motor application brochures, identify the motor full load current and select the inverter which meets or exceeds the motor full load current requirements.

2. Motor Speed Range

Motor synchronous speed is determined by the following equation:

Sync. Motor Speed =

Frequency

120 X Applied

Number of Motor Poles

Induction motors operate at a somewhat slower speed than synchronous speed due to slip, which is generally 2-3 percent of synchronous speed.

If the application requirements call for higher or lower speeds than can be obtained by using standard motors following these application guidelines, gear increasers or reducers should be considered.

3. Multi Motor Drives

Multiple motors can be driven simultaneously by one drive unit.

In order to select the proper inverter, total the individual motor full load currents sums and multiply the sums by a factor of 1.1. Select the inverter than can deliver the total current calculated. Each motor will require individual overload relays.

4. Acceleration Time

Acceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for a faster acceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overcurrent condition. Therefore, the actual time to accelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the acceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.

TA =

(Wk 2 X

#

N)

308 (T X 1.2)

Where:

TA = Time to accelerate the driven load (in seconds).

#

N = Change in speed (in RPM)

WK 2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor shaft.

Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.

2 )

T = Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)

When using a drive in a conventional constant speed machine application where a full voltage starter has been used, the acceleration time should be set longer than the original machine. This is because the maximum allowable current that the drive can deliver is 150 percent of rated, while full voltage starters deliver 600-800 percent. This means that the drive delivers a “soft start” and thus reduces starting torque over that of a full voltage starter, which naturally yields a longer acceleration time.

G

G-3




HOW TO SELECT DRIVES (CONT’D.)

5. Deceleration Time

Deceleration time is programmable. If the programmed setting calls for faster deceleration than the drive system is capable of, the unit may trip due to an overvoltage or overcurrent condition.

Therefore, the actual time required to decelerate the driven load should be calculated using the following equation and the deceleration time setting should be adjusted accordingly.

TD =

(Wk 2 X

#

N)

308 (T X .2)

Where:

TD = Time to decelerate the driven load (in seconds).

#

N = Change in speed (in RPM)

Wk 2 = The total system inertia reflected to the motor shaft.

Includes motor, machine gears (in ft./lbs.

2 )

T = Motor full load torque (lb./ft.)

If faster deceleration is required, refer to the Company.

ORDERING INFORMATION

Machine

Motor

Please provide the following information to assure proper application of the drive

• Name________________________________ For __________________________________ Drive

• Name of Manufacturer

• Type l

TEFC l

DP l

Others ( _______________________________________)

• Horsepower ___________ • Number of Poles _________________

• Full Load Current ________A

• Frequency ______________ Hz

• Voltage _________________V

• 3. _______________________ V _______________________%_______________________Hz

Power Supply

Operating Frequency

Range

Duty

Load

Start/Stop

Environment

•__________________________ Hz Minimum to __________________________ Hz Maximum➀ l

Continuous __________________________H/Day l

Repetitive Operating Time __________________________Minutes

Downtime__________________________Minutes l

Constant Torque l

Variable Torque l

Constant Horsepower

•* Maximum Load Torque ______________ lb./ft. @ ______________ RPM

•* Load Inertia Wk

2

______________ ft./lb.

2

• Acceleration Time____________ Seconds • Deceleration Time ____________ Seconds

• Ambient temperature__________________°C l

Dust l

Rating _______________________ KVA l

Other ( _____________________________)

Inverter

Other Options

➀

Variable torque loads operated above line frequency require larger drives (& motors) due to increased loading. Verify motor is capable of overspeed.

G-4

* Calculated at motor shaft




AF-300E$™

•

Available Ratings

– 1-125 HP, 380-460 VAC. 3 Phase. 50/60 Hz

– 0.5-30 HP, 200-230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

•

Control

– Twin 16-bit microprocessors operating with a speed allowing the drive to maximize frequency regulation with acceleration rate and impact loading, making adjustments quickly to avoid nuisance trips.

• Key Features and Functions

– Torque Vector Control with auto tune feature.

– Dual nameplate rating for constant and variable torque.

– Multiple, independently adjustable, accel/decel rates.

– Slip compensation.

– Torque boost.

– 10 selectable carrier frequencies.

– 5 programmable Inputs and Outputs

– Resonant frequency rejection.

– Static DC braking.

– Adjustable torque limit.

– Electronic reversing.

– Run and Fault output contact (Run available only on 40 HP and above rating).

– Programmable open collector outputs.

– Automatic (programmable) Restart and Reset.

– 15 ms control power ride through.

– Output ground fault protection.

– Signal follower (0-10V, 4-20mA).

– Pulse frequency output.

– 0-10V output, proportional to frequency, current, torque, or power.

– User programmable via keypad.

– Digital Display – 4 digit LED.

– Graphic Display – LCD, with brightness control.

– Designed to NEMA standards and compatible with NEC installation requirements.

– UL 508 listed and CSA certified.

•

Protective functions

– Stall prevention.

– Momentary power failure

– Drive overheating

– External Faults

– CPU malfunction

– Motor overload (electronic thermal)

– Undervoltage

– Overvoltage

– Overcurrent

– Link error

– Communication error

– Ground fault

•

Available Diagnostic information

– Acceleration Overcurrent

– Deceleration Overcurrent

– Constant speed Overcurrent

– Ground fault

– Undervoltage

– Overvoltage at accel

– Overvoltage at decel

– Overvoltage at constant speed

– DC bus fuse failed

– Drive overheat (Heatsink)

– External alarm

– Drive internal temperature

– EE Prom malfunction

– Communication error

– CPU malfunction

– Link error

– Option malfunction

– Drive error at start-up

– Missing motor connection

•

Optional Features

– Relay card

– GENIUS™ communication card

– RS 485 communication card

– Dynamic Breaking

• Typical Default Settings

Frequency Command

Operation Method

Maximum Frequency

Base Frequency

Rated Output Voltage

Acceleration Time

Deceleration Time

Torque Boost

Number of Motor Ploles

FM Terminal Output Volts

Energy Savings

Motor Sound

Language

0-10VDC & 4-20mA

Terminal strip

60 Hz

60 Hz

460 Vac

6s (20s for 40 HP & up)

6s (20s for 40 HP & up)

Automatic

4

100% (0-10V)

Inactive

10kHz

English

G

G-5



AF300E$ Specification

Input

Output

Control

Power System

Converter Control System

Frequency Control Range

Rated Voltage

Carrier Frequency

Frequency Fluctuation

Operation

Indication

Conditions

Frequency Resolution

Torque Boost

Accel/Decel Settings

DC Braking

Torque Vector Control

Standard Functions

Momentary Voltage Dip

Frequency Setting Input

Input Signal (contacts)

Output Signal

Protection

Keypad Panel

Setting

Faults

Charge Lamp

Location

Ambient Temperature

Storage Temperature

Ambient Humidity

Vibration

Type enclosure

Options & Accessories

200-230 & 380-480V AC, 50/60 Hz +10 –15%

Sinusoidal PWM (with torque vector control)

0.2 to 400 Hz (Consult the company for drive operation >120 Hz_

Voltage: 200 to 230 & 380 to 480V AC

2 to 15K Hz (up to 30 Hp) 2 to 10K Hz (40–75 Hp) 2–6K Hz (100–350 Hp)

Digital setting: +/0.01% of max. frequency (@ –10°C tp 50°C)

Analog setting: +/–0.2% of max. frequency (@ 25°C +/–10°C)

Digital setting: 0.01 Hz @ max. frequency <100 Hz; .1 Hz @ max. frequency, >100 Hz

Analog setting: 1/3000 of max. frequency (ex. 0.02 Hz/60 Hz)

Adjustable from 0.1 to 20 (variable, proportional & constant torque load characteristics) or automatic

0.01 to 3600 sec. independently adjustable, linear, non-linear & S-curve characteristic

Frequency activation Hz =>0.1 to 60 Hz, operating time: 0.1 to 30 sec. Voltage 0 to 100%

Optimizes drive operation at low frequency

Slip compensation, torque limit control, switch from line to inverter, restart alfter instantaneous power failure, multi-speed and acceleration/deceleration settings, 3 jump frequencies, bias frequency, pattern operation & energy saving selection.

When input voltage dips below 165V AC (230V AC system) or 310V AC (460V AC system) inverter can operate for 15 millisec with 85% of full load applied.

Potentiometer or voltage input: 0 to 10V DC, adjusts to 5V DC

Process follower input: 4 to 20mA DC (external), adjusts to 10mA

7 preset frequency levels selectable by contact closure (internal)

Forward-Reverse, self-hold selection, 7 preset frequency levels/multi-step speed selection, acceleration/deceleration time selection, coast to stop, external alarm input & alarm reset input.

Relay output: Fault alarm (SPST, 250V AC, 0.3A inductive)

Open collector output: 14 selectable running conditions

Analog output FMA =>0–10V DC selectable: frequency, current, torque & load factor

Digital output FMP => voltage & pulse rate yielding frequency output.

Inverter: current limit, instantaeous overcurrent torque limit, overload, overvoltage, incoming transients, undervoltage & overheating, short circuit & ground fault for output, motor & dynamic braking overheating, stall protection :& setup error.

Output frequency, current, voltage, torque, synchronous speed & line (machine speed)

Function, operational and data codes

Overcurrent during acceleration & deceleration and running at constant speed; overvoltage, undervoltage, overheating, motor overload (electronic OL relay): external fault; setting, communication, memory, cpu, option, operating procedure and tuning error.

Previous 3 faults retained in memory.

DC link voltage level detection.

Indoor, altitude up to 3300 ft. (1000M), drive derate required above 300 ft. Do not install in locations exposed to dust, corrosive gas, oil splashes, or direct sunlight.

–10 to 50°C (ratings up to 30 Hp requires ventilating covers be removed)

–20 to 65°C

20 to 90% (non-condensing)

0.6G or less

NEMA 1 standard; NEMA 4/12 optional

Relay output unit, function code copy unit, keypad extension cable for remote operation, dynamic braking units, AC line reactors, serial communications link.

G-6



1/2 to 30 HP AF-300E$ DRIVE RATING

Solid State Drives & Starters

G-7

G



40 to 125 HP AF-300E$ DRIVE RATING

G-8



DRIVE CONFIGURATION IN MOTOR CONTROL CENTER CONSTRUCTION

Circuit Breaker or Fusible Switch Required for Disconnect

G-9

G

Spectra™ Series and 8000-Line


Basic

Drive

Drive with

Bypass

Drive with Line

Isolation

Drive with

Bypass and Line

Isolation

AF300E$ SPACE HEIGHT AND ASSEMBLY REFERENCE

Function

Basic

Drive

Drive with

Bypass or Line

Isolation

Drive with

Bypass and

Isolation

Function

P

L

U

G

I

N

U

G

P

L

I

N

P

L

U

G

I

N

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

HP's @

200/208

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15–25

30

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15–25

30

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15–25

30

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15

20–30

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15

20–30

HP's @

230/240

.1–5.0

7.5

10

15

20–30

HP's @

380/50 Hz

.1–5.0

7.5–10

HP's @

460/480

.1–5.0

7,5–10

15–25

30

40–50

15–25

30

40–50

60–75

.1–5.0

7.5–10

15–25

30

40–50

60–75

.1–5.0

7.5–10

15–25

30

40–50

60–75

60–100

.1–5.0

7.5–10

15–25

30

40–50

60–100

.1–5.0

7.5–10

15–25

30

40–50

60–100

Disconnect

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI. SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SFLI, SFLT

QMW

SELI, SELT`

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SFLI, SFLT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SELI, SELT

QMW

SFLI, SFLT

QMW

Section 1

Width

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

X Height

4.5

4.5

5,0

5.0

4.5

4.5

5.0

5.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.0

3.0

3.0

4.0

4.0

3.5

3.5

5.0

5.0

3.5

3.5

4.5

4.5

2.5

2.5

3.0

3.0

2.0

2.0

2.5

2.5

5.5

5.5

5.0

5.0

5.5

5.5

5.0

5.0

4.0

4.0

5.5

5.5

3.5

3.5

4.0

4.0

Section 2

Width

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

X Height

2.0

2.0

1.0

1.0

4.0

4.0

2.0

2.0

5.0

5.0

NEMA

Size

5

6

5

5

HP's @

380/50 Hz

100

125

100

125

100

125

100

125

HP's @

460/480

125

125

125

125

Disconnect

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

GL4I. GL4T

QMR

GL4I, GL4T

QMR

30"

30"

24"

24"

30"

30"

30"

30"

24"

24"

SECT 1

Width

24"

24"

30"

30"

24"

24"

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

X Ht

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

24"

SECT 2

Width

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"

3.0

4.5

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

3.0

4.5

2" BUS

X Ht

2.0

4.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

6.0

3.0

4.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

3.0

4.5

4" BUS

X Ht

2.0

4.0

2.0

4.0

5.5

5.5

SECT 3

Width

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

X Ht

3.5

3.5

1.5

5.0

1.5

5.0

NOTE: Stationary mounted drives require 2" vent installed on the top of MCC section. Dimensions shown above do not reflect additional space required for load filters. Refer to factory if required.

For layout purposes, any X height 5.0 or larger will not permit additional units in that section.

G-10



SOLID STATE STARTERS

GENERAL

The GE solid-state starter is a reduced-voltage starter that provides smooth, stepless controlled acceleration of AC squirrel cage induction motors from standstill to full speed. It provides controlled extended starting times by supplying continuously varying voltage to the AC motor from zero to full voltage. The solid-state starter can be supplied in 8000-Line motor control center construction to combine the advantages of solid-state starters together with conventional electromechanical motor control.

ADVANTAGES OF SOLID-STATE STARTERS

• Inexpensive conventional NEMA design B, C, or D induction motors.

• Lower maintenance cost through elimination of power line transients, excessive line voltage dips as well as high impact torques transmitted to mechanical linkages.

• Lower operating costs versus equivalent electromechanical starters together with a concurrent reduction in starter size and power requirements.

• Starting characteristics can be matched to the specific application for smooth startup and protection.

• Automatic regulation and control of starting currents. Continuous monitoring of motor line current provides automatic shutdown in the event of locked-rotor or mechanical jamming of couplings, etc.

Description

GE’s advanced ASTAT-CD™ solid state reduced voltage starter

— sometimes called a soft starter — is the industry’s first solid state starter featuring microprocessor controlled digital technology, digital adjustment, digital alphanumeric display and error code traceability. These features, coupled with the optional communications module, allow the ASTAT-CD to be effectively incorporated into distributed control systems and automated plant processes. Up to 16

ASTAT-CD solid state reduced voltage starters can be coupled on a single bi-directional serial RS422/485 computer interface.

The ASTAT-CD starter’s advanced control technology individually fires each phase in a special selected sequence to offer reliable performance for the smooth acceleration of all types of loads.

reducing shock to mechanical components, thereby extending component and motor life.

Each starter consists of an electronic control module and a power base consisting of six SCRs arranged in anti-phase parallel pairs for optimum performance. The ASTAT-CD starter’s deceleration ramp is programmed with non-linear characteristics to more closely match variable torque loads to help eliminate water hammer and stress on couplings, plastic pipe and check valves in pumping applications.

The ASTAT-CD starter offers many standard features including energy savings mode with override, adjustable current limit, motor overload protection, kick start, loss of load detection, and loss of phase protection. These, plus many additional features, make the

ASTAT-CD starter the obvious choice for reduced voltage starting applications.

Application

ASTAT-CD solid state reduced voltage starters are used to reduce or eliminate mechanical shock and stress on mechanical components such as vee belts, gear boxes, chain drives, couplings, transmissions and shafts. ASTAT-CD reduced voltage starters are used to reduce brownout conditions and may limit energy and demand charges. ASTAT-CD solid state reduced voltage starters are used to control process lines, to smoothly accelerate and decelerate loads, to position and move loads and restrict process surges.

Typical applications include: compressors, pumps, belted equipment, centrifuges, conveyors, cranes, crushers, winches, fans/blowers, extruders, flywheels, hoists, laundry extractors, mixers, packaging equipment, machine tools, shears, saws, spinning frames, textile machinery, winders and wire drawing machines.

Note: When installed in the Motor Control Center, the “standard” ASTAT-CD starter is rated for motors with a 1.15 service factor. It provides 300% motor full load current for 30 seconds acceleration, or, when the overload curve is selected for heavy duty, will also provide 450% motor fla for 30 seconds. The 500% rated starter has been derated to provide extra capacity for those loads requiring heavy starting currents due to high inertia, or conveyor type applications.

The electronic OL on the standard duty ASTAT is suitable for motor protection when programmed at 300%. When using 450%

(or 500%) acceleration limits, always verify motor capacity for extended acceleration time with motor manufacturer. Separate OL relay required with 500% ratings, since ASTAT is derated for extra capacity beyond standard OL curves.

G-11



ASTAT-CD Default Settings

ASTAT-CD starters are supplied with the following factory settings:

Nominal motor current

Current limit

Starting torque

Acceleration ramp

Deceleration ramp

Kick start time

Kick start

DC braking time

DC braking current

DC brake

Soft stop

Energy saving

150%

Off

Off

Terminal (3-57 open) On

Terminal (3-57 jumper) Disabled

Overload trip

User configurable relay

Standard duty

Run

Fault

Local Control

(DIP switch 1 down)

No load detection

(DIP switch 2 down)

100%

300%

15%

20 sec.

20 sec.

100 msec.

Off

5 sec.

Engaged

Not engaged

Enabled

Disabled

The following options are hardware enabled when the option is supplied in starter control module:

1

0

1 2 3 4

Communications

Remote

1

0

1 2 3 4

Inch jog 14%

1

0

1 2 3 4

Inch jog 7%

1

0

1 2 3 4

Tachometer feedback

Semiconductor Fuse

Starter

QC2G*A

QC2I*A

Selection

Gould Shawmut

Type A50QS

60A

100A

QC2K*A

QC2M*A

QC2Q*A

QC2S*A

200A

350A

600A

2 x 600A in parallel

Solid State Drives & Starters

8000-LINE MCC CONFIGURATION

The basic combination nonreversing starter in 8000-Line motor control center construction consists of:

– Primary line disconnect (circuit breaker/fusible switch)

– ASTAT solid state starter

– Semiconductor type (I 2 t) fuses for SCR protection

– Control power transformer

– 3-Phase thermal overload relay (required with bypass)

– NEMA 1 indoor-ventilated enclosure

Options

POWER

– Bypass contactor for starting-duty application

Note: This option required when NEMA 12 enclosure is specified

– Starter isolation contactor

– Isolation contactor and bypass contactor for full-voltage operation after controlled startup.

– Reversing duty contactors

– DC braking contactor

– Motor thermal overload (thermistor input)

– Running phase failure protection

– Ground fault protection

CONTROL

– Local Start/Stop pushbuttons (provision for remote Start/Stop)

– H-O-A selector switch

– Local/Remote selector switch

– Manual bypass selector switch

– Status indicating lights

– Standard and oversized control power transformers

– Time-delay relay

– Auxiliary control relay, 4-pole

– Circuit breaker UVR or shunt trip, bell alarm switch

– Line disconnect auxiliary contact

INSTRUMENTATION

– Current transformers

– Ammeter, panel type

– Ammeter, switchboard type

– Meter transfer switch

– Potential transformers

– Voltmeter, panel type

– Voltmeter, switchboard type

ENCLOSURE

– NEMA 12 indoor enclosure with bottom plates (requires bypass option)

– Thermostat with space heaters (external power required)

– Space heater only

Note: When ASTAT-CD™ Reduced Voltage Starters are used in conjunction with semi-conductor fuses, Type 2 Coordination to IEC 947-4 is attained.

These fuses are recommended for best overall short circuit protection.

(Rating of 100KA @ 208V thru 480VAC)

G-12

Standard Features

DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Provides precise phase control of the back to back SCRs over each

1

/

2 cycle. Special ASTAT-CD™ design allows initial motor torque to be adjusted from 10% to 90%.

DIGITAL CONTROL PANEL

Displays setup and operating parameters with alphanumeric display. Provides accurate setting of parameters and visible indication of starter status and fault codes.

MOTOR THERMISTOR PROTECTION INPUT

Used with motors protected with PTC thermistor. Trips within

200msec when resistance is higher than 2800-3200 ohms. Resets when resistance falls below 1000 ohms.

STALLED ROTOR PROTECTOR

Power is removed from motor when stalled condition exceeds

200msec. Provides motor protection and process feedback.

SOFT STARTING

The most frequent application for the ASTAT-CD starter. Provides a linear increase in voltage at the motor terminals, eliminates starting shock to the load and reduces stress on mechanical components, such as gears, belt drives, piping and valves.

THREE SEGMENT RAMP

The three segment ramp consists of (1) the initial voltage ramp which lasts for 5 cycles and brings voltage from 0 to the preset initial pedestal voltage (30%-95%). (2) Acceleration ramp - increases motor voltage from preselected initial voltage to 100% voltage over selected acceleration time period. (3) Fast ramp - brings motor voltage to 100% if motor reaches full speed prior to end of acceleration ramp.

SNUBBERS

RC network connected in parallel with SCR to protect against commutation spikes, thereby limiting harmonics being fed into power lines.

MOVs

Metal oxide varistors used to protect electronic components against external voltage spikes.

ERROR TRACEABILITY

Displays last 4 error codes on alphanumeric display. Affords feedback for corrective action.

PHASE LOSS PROTECTION

Removes power from motor terminals in 3 seconds upon detection of phase loss. Provides additional protection against motor burnout.

ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY

Overload relay selectable trip characteristic - for standard (300%,

30 sec.) or heavy duty (450%, 30 sec.) applications. Provides accurate, repeatable, reliable motor protection.

KICK START

Used to start loads with a high breakaway torque (belted conveyors, extruders, mixers). Feature may be engaged (95% voltage for a time of 1-999msec, or feature may be disengaged for applications not requiring kick start.

THERMAL OVERLOAD MEMORY

Overload relay retains memory of overload conditions to closely profile motor winding thermal condition to insure adequate protection under repetitive overload conditions. Memory is maintained as long as the control power remains applied to the soft starter.

SCR OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION

Heat sinks are fitted with thermostats to protect SCR against fan failure. (Trip @ 80°C ± 5°; reset @ 50°C ± 10°C)

CURRENT LIMIT

The motor current may be limited with an adjustable current range from 100-450% starting current. Used to reduce starting current to limit brownout/low voltage conditions during motor starting.

SOFT STOPPING

Allows motor driven load to be brought to rest over an adjustable time period. The enhanced soft stop pump control allows pump shut down while limiting pump system water hammer and fluid surges.

ENERGY SAVING MODE

Reduces motor voltage under no load or low load conditions, thereby reducing reactive power required by the motor. Motor voltage is automatically increased as the load is increased. Feature may be disengaged when not desired.

DC BRAKING

Braking current is adjustable from keypad for a range from 50-

250% of the operational current for a predetermined time (0-99 seconds). Also keyboard selectable, feature may be disengaged when not desired. Requires external contactor.

FREQUENCY ERROR DETECTION

Electronic frequency sensing will not allow start to begin load ramp-up if frequency is < 48Hz or > 62Hz, providing protection to the motor and starter should frequency be excessively out of tolerance.

LONG START TIME PROTECTION

If current limit is set too low and/or starting time is longer than 240 sec. or two times the preselected acceleration ramp time, it is assumed that the motor heating could be excessive. The ASTAT-

CD starter provides long start time protection and disconnects the load under these conditions.

3 OUTPUT RELAYS

• Run/fault relay – user configurable from keypad. When configured as run, relay contacts close upon initialization of start command and open when stop order is given or the starter shuts down due to a fault condition. When configured as a fault, the relay closes when control power is applied and opens only if a fault condition is detected.

• At speed relay (end of ramp), contact closes when starting ramp voltage reaches the end of ramp, indicating the motor is running at full speed.

LOSS OF LOAD DETECTION

Prevents motor burnout for application in which driven load is also cooling motor (for example a submersible pump motor). Time delay is 10 seconds after load loss, feature is DIP switch selectable.

• DC brake relay – contact closes to supply voltage to external injection braking contactor when brake command is given.

G-13



SOLID STATE STARTERS


SLOW SPEED

Factory option which, when supplied, is engaged by DIP switch selection. DIP switch selection allows user to engage either 7% or

14% speed to align or position loads.

TACHOMETER FEEDBACK

Factory option which, when supplied, provides linear speed ramp independent of load torque. Speed feedback is provided by user supplied tachometer attached to driven shaft. A voltage transducer is required to match tachometer voltage to required input voltage range (0 to 5VDC). Option is DIP switch selectable when supplied.

COMMUNICATIONS RS422/485

Factory option which, when supplied, allows setup and readout of starter parameters and operating conditions via serial computer connection. Up to 16 ASTAT-CD starters may be monitored and controlled on a single serial interface. Starters are DIP switch identified on communications board and maintain identity via communications link. Each starter may be given its own name/location identity on the computer screen. Each starter may be configured either locally through enabling local control or remotely at the computer interface terminal. If local setup is required, the setup parameters may be polled by the computer terminal and the configuration saved for remote control.

Fault conditions. The following 17 fault conditions are detected by the solid-state reduced voltage starter and digitally displayed:

Fault conditions

Frequency out of range

Overload trip

Phase sequence lost

Synchronism lost

Phase A SCR shorted

Phase B SCR shorted

Phase C SCR shorted

Heatsink overtemperature

Motor thermistor

Fault conditions

Phase A lost

Phase B lost

Phase C lost

Stalled rotor

Internal error

No motor load

Long start time (current limit)

Long jog speed time

The last four faults to occur are recorded.

ASTAT-CD Digital Control Panel

DS4

DS3

DS2

DS1

1

0

1 2 3 4

DIP-switch

Display

Product

Microprocessor technology. The solid-state reduced voltage starter uses digital microprocessor technology for high reliability and versatility.

Keyboard/digital display. The starter is keypad programmable and has an alphanumeric display capable of displaying setpoints and running functions. The starter provides traceable fault diagnostics when fault conditions occur. The display has the ability to look back at the last four events and actively indicate the present mode of operation:

Push buttons

Use with or to select the parameter or function code to be displayed and/or modified

C/V

Decrease the value of the selected parameter

Enter (return)

• Introduce the new

parameter value

into memory

• Update the selected

parameter value

with the displayed

value

Increase the value of the selected parameter

ON

SAVE

STOP

SOFT

LOCK

DCBK

PULS

FULL

RAMP

INCH

FULL

TACH

Display Indicators

Equipment connected to main supply

Energy saving

Stop

Soft stop

Remote stop/lockout

DC braking

Kick start

Override (full voltage)

Acceleration ramp

Inching/jog speed

Full conduction

Linear ramp (tacho generator)

Electronic overload. The solid-state reduced voltage starter provides overload functions for both starting and running protection. An overload condition automatically de-energizes the starter and registers a fault. The overload function is selectable for either standard or heavy-duty motor operation. When the relay trips, thermal memory is maintained as long as the control voltage remains applied to the starter. The overload relay is suitable for either heavy-duty starting (450% current, 30 seconds) or standard-duty starting (300% current, 30 seconds). The overload has the following trip time characteristics:

Current Limit Standard-Duty Heavy-Duty

(% of MFLC)

150%

300%

425%

420 seconds

30

6.5

420 seconds

55

33

G-14



Starting and Stopping

Figures 6 and 7 illustrate a combination of several of the most popular drive functions for both starting and stopping: voltage ramp, acceleration ramp, kick start, pedestal voltage, soft stop, current limit. Figure 8 illustrates pumping control (Water “Hammer” Prevention).

Starting by Voltage Ramp

% Output Voltage

Current

100%

4

2

3

Starter

Output

Voltage

(%)

1a

3

1

Start At Speed

Figure 6

5

Soft Stop

Starting by Voltage Ramp and Current Limi t

6

Figure 7

➀

Initial ramp (5 main frequency cycles).

1a

Initial voltage ramp or pedestal (adjustable from 30 - 90% volts) provides quick ramping to initial motor rotation point. Starting torque required by load is also a programming setpoint (adjustable from 10% - 90% of full voltage value).

In this example, motor starting current is below the starter’s current limit setting and the current limit override has no effect on the starting ramp. During set-up programming, all starters have an adjustable current limit setpoint.

➁

Kick-start function - user selectable “On” or

“Off” - provides 95% voltage pulse immediately following end of pedestal ramp.

Pulse time adjustable from 0 to 999 msec.

Objective - to overcome static or seal friction.

➂

Voltage acceleration ramp (time adjustable from 1 to 999 seconds)

➃

Quick ramp up - automatic fast ramp when motor is up to speed prior to end of normal ramp time.

➄

Rated speed - starter at full voltage.

➅

Soft stop - non-linear voltage ramp

(deceleration time adjustable from 1 to 999 seconds).

➆

Current limit (ramp hold). The current limiting set point between 100% to 450% FLA

➇

Stop mode - standard stopping (coast to reset). When stop push button is pressed, starter cuts off voltage to motor and it coasts to a stop. During set-up program, user choose either soft stop or coast to stop.

Pumping Control Using Voltage Ramp, Pedestal

Voltage, Soft Stop and Load Loss “Protection

3

100%

4

2

Discharge

Check Valve

Closes

Line

Voltage

Percent

5

1

➀

Initial value - set both voltage and torque values below values that produce a speed that will open discharge check valve. Objective is for check valve to open during voltage ramp - not at or before completion of pedestal.

➁

Voltage ramp acceleration.

➂

Rated speed.

➃

Soft stop, adjustable ramp down.

➄

Discharge check valve opens. Either starter load-loss function (10 seconds delay) or quick shutdown function shuts off starter.

NOTE: Soft Stop Pump Control disables Kick

Start and DC Brake functions.

Time

Figure 8

G-15



1-4 Technical Characteristics

Environmental

Temperature

Relative humidity

Maximum altitude

Mounting positions

Electrical characteristics

Three phase supply voltage

Frequency

Rated Current

Motor horsepower (KW)

Motor voltages

Control voltages

Control characteristics

Control system

0 to +45°C ➀

95% without condensation

3300 feet (1000m) ➁

Vertical

500VAC + 10% maximum

48 - 62Hz

11 ratings, 14 - 370A

7.5 - 300HP at 480V, (7.5 - 250 KW at 500V)

200V, 230V, 460V (220V, 380/415V, 440V, 500V for IEC)

110/120VAC or 220/240VAC, 50/60Hz

Digital system with microcontroller

Starting ramp with progressive increase in voltage and current limitation

Starting

Initial voltage (pedestal)

Initial (starting) torque

Kick start

(Full Load) Motor current (in)

Current limit

Acceleration ramp time

Running

Energy savings

Override - energy savings

Stopping

Coasting

Brake time by ramp

30 to 95% line voltage

10 to 90% Full voltage starting torque

95% line voltage (90% Full voltage starting torque), adjustable 0 to 999ms

0.4 to 1.0 x 6 rated starter current (lr)

100 to 450% in (FLA)

1 to 999 sec

Output voltage reduction according to power factor of running motor to optimize system energy consumption

Fixed output voltage permanently equal to supply voltage, energy saving mode turned OFF

With no soft stop or DC brake, power removed from motor

Soft stop, 1 to 999 sec adjustable independently of starting ramp time (longer than coast down time)

DC brake, 0 to 99 sec (set no longer than time to actual stop)

DC brake, 50 to 250% in

Brake time DC injection

Braking current by

DC injection

Reduced voltage starter operating modes

Acceleration phase

Running phase

Stop phase

Adjustable time, initial torque, kick start, current limit

Energy savings or Full voltage (Override mode) choice

Power cut-off (coasting) / Ramp down (soft stop)

/ DC Braking

Options

Linear ramp with tachogenerator feedback

(selected with dip-switch 3)

1 to 999 sec

Slow speed

(selected with dip switch 4

Selectable [7% or 14% speed] with dip-switch 3)

Current: In

Time limit: 120 sec.

ASTAT Block Diagram

lr = ASTAT Current Rating ln = Motor FLA

Inputs / Outputs

Starter control

Inputs

Input ratings

Output auxiliary relays

Relay output ratings

Communications (Option)

Transmission mode

Transmission method

Baud rate

Error detection

Maximum distance

Maximum number of ASTAT stations within the net

Start/Stop/Bypass inputs

4 isolated inputs for Start/Stop/Override energy saving/motor thermal protection input (PTC)

12VDC solid state optoisolators

1. Start/Fault (selectable, 1NO, 1NC)

2. Up to speed (1NO)

3. For DC brake contactor (1NO)

5A Maximum

120VAC 360VA, Pilot duty B300 & 1/3HP 45LRA

7.2FLA

240VAC 470VA Pilot duty B300 & 1/2HP 30LRA

5.0FLA

General purpose DC ratings: 24VDC 8A

48VDC 0.8A

240VDC 0.1A

Protections

Current limit

Overload (I 2 x t)

Loss of input phase

Thyristor short circuit

Heatsink overheating

Motor thermistor

Loss of output phase

Stalled rotor

Supply frequency error

No motor load

Error (CPU)

Memory

Long start time

Long slow speed time

Adjustable from 100 to 450% In

See figure on page 21 for cold starting overload conditions & time delay between starts

Trip at 3 sec

Trip at 200msec

Trip at 200msec (trips at 80°C +/- 5°C, reset at

50°C +/- 10°C)

Trip at 200msec if thermistor impedance

>response value

Trip at 3 sec

Trip at 200 msec

If frequency < 48Hz or frequency > 62 Hz will not start

10 sec

60msec

Last four error codes

2 times accelerating time(ta), 240msec. max.

(Current limit ramp hold only)

120 sec

Features

SCR repetitive peak inverse voltage rating - 1600V standard

Transient Protection - Metal Oxide Varisters - QC2F through QC2M use 120 joules

- QC2N through QC2QS use 220 joules

RS-422 or RS-485; 2 or 4 wires; semiduplex; 1:N

Asynchronous (1 bit START, 1 bit STOP, 8 bits

ASCII DATA, selectable parity bit O/E/N)

9600, 4800, 3400 or 1200 selectable

Parity and CHECKSUM

3300 feet (1000 meters)

16

Jog

Run

Stop

120/240 Vac

Control Power

Programming

Inputs

DIP SW PB SW

Starter Regulator

Phase Input Data

Main Input

Power

Tach.

Override

Firing

Circuit

SCR

Module ➀ Reduce rated controller current (lr) by 1.5% /°C above 45°C, maximum 55°C.

➁ Reduce rated controller current (lr) by 1% / 330 feet above 3300 feet, maximum

10000 feet

(1% / 100 meters above 1000 meters, maximum 3000 meters).

Converter

Motor

Thermistor

Output Interface Circuitry

Phase Output Data

Run/Alarm At

Speed

DC

Brake

Operator Display

Output To Motor

G-16



GE ASTAT SOLID STATE STARTERS STANDARD DUTY

(300% / 450% Selectable) For Larger HP Ratings, Consult Factory (600 HP Max.)

Section 2

Width

.25

Function

SSS

Basic

SSS with

Bypass or

Isolation

S

T

A

B

I

N

S

T

A

B

I

N

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

HP's @

200/208

.1–.3

5–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40

50–60

75

100

.1–3

5–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40

50–60

75

100

HP's @

230/240

.1–.3

5–7.5

10–15

20

25–30

40–50

60–75

100

125

.1–3

5–7.5

10–15

20

25–30

40–50

60–75

100

125

HP's @

380/50 Hz

.1–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60

75

100–125

150

200–250

.1–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60

75

100–125

150

200–250

HP's @

460/480

.1–7.5

15–20

25

30–40

50

60

75–100

125–150

200

250

.1–7/.5

15–20

25

30–40

50

60

75–100

125–150

200

250

SSS Cat. No.

FLA @ 1.15 SF

QC2GDA

13.9A

QC2IDA

27.8A

QC2KDA

54.8A

QC2MDA

91.3A

QC2QDA

187.0A

QC2SDA

321.7A

QC2GDA

13.9A

QC21DA

;27.8A

QC2KDA

54.8A

QC2MDA

91.3A

QC2QDA

187.0A

QC2SDA

321.7A

GE ASTAT SS STARTERS HEAVY DUTY (500%)

Function

SSS

Basic

SSS with

Bypass or

Isolation

S

T

A

B

I

N

S

T

A

B

I

N

NEMA

Size

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

HP's @

200/208

.1–3

3–5

10

15

20–25

30–40

50

60–75

.1–3

3–5

10

15

20–25

30–40

50

60–75

HP's @

230/240

.1–3

5–7.5

10–15

20–30

40–50

60

75–100

.1–3

5–7.5

10–15

20–30

40–50

60

75–100

HP's @

380/50 Hz

.1–5

7.5–10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60–75

100

125–150

.1–5

7.5–10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60–75

100

125–150

HP's @

460/480

.1–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60–100

125

150–200

.1–7.5

10

15

20–25

30

40–50

60–100

125

150–200

SSS Cat. No.

FLA @ 1.15 SF

QC2GDA

11.3A

QC21DA

22.5A

QC2KDA

44.4A

QC2MDA

74.0A

QC2QDA

151.5A

QC2SDA

260,6A

QC2GDA

11.3A

QC21DA

22.5A

QC2KDA

44.4A

QC2MDA

74.0A

QC2QDA

151.5A

QC2SDA

260.6A

Disconnect

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30/60

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

SFLT, SFLI

QMW 200/100/200

SG

QMW 400/200/400

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30/60

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

SFLT, SFLI

QMW 200/100/200

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SG

QMR 400/200/400

Disconnect

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30/60

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 200/100

SELT, SELI

SFLT, SFLI

QMW 200/100/200

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SG

QMR 600/400

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 30/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30

SELT, SELI

QMW 60/30/60

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 100/60/100

SELT, SELI

QMW 200/100

SELT, SELI

SFLT, SFLI

QMW 200/100/200

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SG

QMR 400/200/400

SG

QMR 600/400

Section 1

24"

24"

30"

30"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

20"

24"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

Width

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20"

24"

24"

24"

24"

30"

30"

IC

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

(KA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

IC

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

(KA)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

5.0

5.5

5.0

5.5

3.0

3.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.5

X Height

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

3.0

3.0

5.0

5.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

6.0

6.0

5.5

5.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

4.0

4.0

4.0

4.5

X Height

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

4.0

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5

6.0

5.5

5.5

5.0

5.0

5.5

5.0

Section 1

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20"

20"

30"

30"

30"

30"

24"

24"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

Width

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20 or 24""

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20" or 24"

20"

24"

24"

24"

30"

30"

30"

30"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

24"

24"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

Section 2

Width

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

20"

X Height

4.0

2.0

4.0

2.0

5.5

X Height

4.0

2.0

4.0

1.5

2.0

2.0

2.0

4.0

3.0

4.5

4.0

3.0

4.5

6.0

6.0

1.5

2.0

2.0

2.0

G-17



STANDARD REDUCED-VOLTAGE, NONREVERSING WITH PRIMARY DISCONNECT

OPTIONS

I. Solid-State Starter with Isolation Contactor

II. Solid-State Starter with Bypass Contactor

III. Solid-State Starter, Reversing

Motor Starting and Duty Cycle Conditions

The following illustration shows allowable motor starting currents according to the starting time.

The OFF TIME is the minimum amount of time between the motor stop and motor start. The duty cycle is the start time + stop time + off time. This graph will enable the user to develop a duty cycle within the capabilities of the motor starter ratings.

Motor Starting current (Is)

Starter current rating (Ir)

G-18

➀ Drawout through 225-ampere frame breaker/200-ampere fusible switch.


Motor Control Centers Components

Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors

➁

Mag-Break motor circuit protectors were specifically developed to provide accurate and fast clearing of low-level faults, the type most prevalent in motor circuits. Because they are designed expressly for motor circuits in combination with overload relays, they minimize damage to motors and motor-control apparatus in addition to protecting motor branch-circuit conductors.

Continuous-current ratings and adjustable instantaneous trip ranges have been designed to meet NEC code requirements concerning motor full-load and locked-rotor current. The instantaneous-trip point can be set low and precisely (just above motor inrush) assuring fault protection and eliminating nuisance tripping.

To minimize circuit damage, select precise, optimum trip points.

Each pole of the Mag-Break breaker contains a current sensing element to trip the breaker instantaneously when the pre-selected current setting is exceeded. Mag-Break’s unique magnetic system permits independent factory calibration of both HI and LO ends of the trip range. This feature provides field adjustability with superior accuracy and repeatability at all Mag-Break trip scale positions.

Mag-Break is field adjustable by means of simple screwdriver adjustments on the front of each breaker. The field-adjustable setting is continuous over the entire range from HI to LO and each breaker rating label contains a table converting setting position to amperes. An overcurrent on any pole will cause all three poles to trip simultaneously, thus preventing costly single phasing problems.

Features of Mag-Break motor circuit protectors include:

• No costly equipment modifications are required. Mag-

Break motor circuit protectors are mechanically interchangeable in all respects with conventional circuit breakers of the same frame size.

• Conventional circuit breaker accessories such as undervoltage release, shunt trip and auxiliary switches can be used.

• Mag-Breaks include the Verifier™-Twist-to-trip – permitting the mechanical simulation of overcurrent tripping through actuation of linkages and latch surfaces not operated by the ON-OFF handle.

Experience has shown that protective devices in industrial applications better maintain their original protective characteristics when regularly exercised.

• Widest trip setting ranges in the industry-specifically designed to meet control flexibility demands of modern motor installations.

• Highly accurate calibration over the entire range of trip settings.

•

“

Designed in

” withstandability for use with slow trip overload relays – meets

“

6 times rated current for 30 seconds

” criteria.

• Mag-Break covers an area of motor circuit protection not provided by any other class of device. In the range of 7-

35X rated current, the region where most motor circuits failures begin. Mag-Break acts instantly to remove the fault from the system. At 13X (the maximum setting allowed by the NEC) other devices take 50 to 400 times as long.

➀

1000

TYPICAL OVERLOAD

HEATER CIRCUIT

OPENING

100

ONE TIME FUSE

10

CLASS J FUSE

MAG BREAK-

ADJUSTABLE

TRIP RANGE

1

HEATER BURNOUT

RANGE

.1

.0167

.02

.01

1X

1 CYCLE

7X

10X 13X 35X 70X 100X 200X

TECL CURRENT

LIMITER

Times Rated Current

• Current Limiter (optional feature) – The Type TECL is a fusible current-limiter attachment that bolts to the load end of the Type Mag-Break motor circuit protector. The limiter provides for up to 100,000 amperes IC at 600 volts AC and is coordinated with the TEC so that normal short circuits will be cleared in the usual fashion. Only the unusual circumstances of a high fault will cause the limiter to function. Type TBC

Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provide 100,000 amperes IC on

225 ampere and larger frame sizes. Type TBC protectors are similar in size and operation to Tri-

Break circuit breakers and employ current limiters integral to the frame as opposed to an add-on limiter such as the Type TECL. TECL is used for 600V applications.

① All data based on NEC requirements and manufacturer’s recommendation.

➁ See Section J for application information.

H1

H



H2

Spectra RMS –

Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protectors

Interchangeable Rating Plug.

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors use the same snap-in rating plugs as fully configured (long-time trip function) Spectra RMS circuit breakers. Each rating plug defines the range of instantaneous-trip settings available to the circuit breaker through its trip setting adjustment.

Trip Setting Adjustment. The solid-state instantaneous-trip circuitry of the Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors has a single, multi-position adjustment at the front of each breaker.

Changes in settings vary the instantaneous-trip and tracking short-time characteristics. The Mag-Break motor circuit protectors differ from a fully configured circuit breaker by providing only an instantaneous and tracking short-time trip function.

Accessory Pockets. Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors have the same accessory pockets and use the same internal accessories as Spectra RMS circuit breakers. This important capability allows field modification of Mag-Break units with shunt trip, undervoltage release, bell alarm or auxiliary switch accessories, in any combination, without affecting UL Listing status.

Spectra RMS Rating Plugs

Use of the same UL Listed interchangeable rating plugs for both

Mag-Break and fully configured Spectra RMS circuit breakers expands the flexibility of the entire Spectra RMS family of products. The advantages of interchangeable rating plugs with

Spectra RMS circuit breakers are inherent to Spectra RMS Mag-

Break units, which permit wider ranges of motor ratings to be protected by a given breaker frame size.

Spectra RMS Mag-Break Trip Unit Characteristics

Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protectors provide positive, reliable, and cost-effective instantaneous, with short-time tracking, overcurrent protection to those circuits where long-time overload protection is supplied by thermal or solid-state overload devices.

Motor Circuit Short-Circuit Protection

When a squirrel-cage induction motor is first energized, a high value of magnetizing inrush current flows for the first few cycles, followed by a substantially reduced current flow while the motor accelerates to its rated speed. Typically, the magnetizing inrush current may be 10 times rated full-load current, for normal efficiency motors and as high as 14 times rated full-load current for high-efficiency motors prior to the first five to eight cycles.

Magnetizing inrush current is followed by a “locked rotor” current of 5 to 6 times rated full-load current during 0.1 to 10 second acceleration phase – with current rapidly declining to full load amperes as the motor nears rated speed.

Optimum instantaneous protection would have a two-tiered tripping characteristic. A high value of current would be tolerated for a few cycles, followed by a lower, sustained trip setting.

That is exactly what is found in the Mag-Break tripping characteristic.

Use of this two-tiered time-current curve prevents nuisance tripping due to magnetizing inrush current, without compromising superior short-circuit protection during motor acceleration as indicated on page H3.

The figure below illustrates the most popular application of

Mag-Break motor circuit protectors. This time-current curve shows a plot of motor current versus time (Curve C) for a threephase squirrel cage induction motor. The shaded portion of the time-current curve (above Curve A) indicates a region of operation that could produce permanent damage to either the motor, its feeder conductors, or both. The trip characteristics of the motor starter’s overload relay is shown as Curve B. The overload relay provides both long-term overload and stall protection. However, the overload relay does not protect the system from short circuits in either the motor or its feeder conductors.

Curve C is a plot of motor current during a worst-case start

(e.g., low line voltage, highest anticipated required load torque, etc.). Curve D is a plot of the Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protector’s tripping characteristic.

With the addition of the Mag-Break motor circuit protector, the motor circuit now has protection against short circuits. Stall and long-term overload protection is provided, in this example, by the motor starter’s overload relay.

Motor Circuit Protection using Mag-Break Motor

Circuit Protectors

50 100

1000

1000

10000

100

10

C

B

A

1

D

0.1

D

0

50 100

1000 10000

Current in Amperes

Spectra RMS Mag-Break Motor Circuit Protector and

Rating Plug Current Ratings

Circuit Breaker

Frame

SE-Frame

Maximum

Frame Amperes

7

30

60

100

150

SF-Frame

SG-Frame

SK-Frame

250

400

600

800

1200

Available Rating

Plugs, Amperes

3 & 7

15, 20, 25 & 30

40, 50 & 60

70, 80, 90 & 100

110, 125 & 150

70, 90, 100, 110, 125

150, 175, 200, 225 & 250

125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350 & 400

250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 & 600

300, 400, 500, 600, 700 & 800

600, 700, 800, 1000 & 1200



Spectra RMS Molded Case Switches

Construction. The family traditions of ruggedness and dependability are continued in the Spectra RMS molded case switch line.

These units provide a circuit disconnect function using the compactness of molded case circuit breaker construction. The operating handle actuates all three poles of the switch using the same common trip bar of Spectra RMS circuit breakers and Mag-Break units.

Termination Lugs. Snap-in termination lugs used with SE- and SF-

Frame Spectra RMS circuit breakers are used interchangeably in

Spectra RMS molded case switches. SG- and SK-Frame molded case switches use the same bolt-on termination lugs used with

Spectra RMS circuit breakers.

External Accessories. The full range of external circuit breaker accessories offered for use with Spectra RMS circuit breakers and

Mag-Break motor circuit protectors, are available for molded case switches. In addition, plug-in bases, motor-operated mechanisms, mechanical interlocks, and the full complement of external handle operators (STDA, TDR and TDM) are available for use with Spectra RMS molded case switches.

Fixed-Trip Setting. The Spectra RMS molded case switches are equipped with a fixed Hi-set instantaneous trip setting whose values are shown in the table below.

Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Fixed-Trip Setting

Molded Case

Switch Frame

SE-Frame

SF-Frame

SG-Frame

SK-Frame

Maximum

Ampere Rating

100

150

250

400

600

800

1200

Fixed-Trip Setting RMS Amperes

Nominal ±20%

2100

2450

5600

6000

12,750

12,600

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Applications

Molded case switches are inherently horsepower-rated. By virtue of the UL489 six-times rated-current overload test, they can be used as motor circuit disconnects where overload and short-circuit protection are provided by other protective devices.

A common application of Spectra RMS molded case switches is illustrated below. The figure shows a system containing three branch circuits.

Branch circuit 1 uses a Spectra RMS Mag-Break motor circuit protector, in conjunction with the overload devices of the motor starter, to protect the motor and the conductors of that branch circuit. Branch circuits 2 and 3 use fully configured Spectra RMS circuit breakers to provide instantaneous, short-time and longtime protection for both branch-circuit conductors and loads.

Spectra RMS molded case switches are excellent circuit disconnect devices for those applications where both the advantages of molded case switch construction are desired, and where the available short-circuit current is less than the switch withstand rating.

All Spectra RMS molded case switches are UL Listed and tested per UL Standard 1087 for molded case switches. The short-circuit withstand ratings are based upon three cycle tests. Thus the

UL Listed upstream overcurrent protective devices (i.e., low-voltage circuit breaker equipped with instantaneous-trip functions, insulated-case circuit breakers, molded case circuit breakers or fuses) can be used in conjunction with molded case switches.

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch Application

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Spectra RMS Molded Case Switch

Feeder

Molded Case Switch

Bus

MagBreak

MCCB MCCB

Motor

Ckt #1

Overload

Conductors

Conductors

To load

Ckt #2

To load

Ckt #3

Spectra RMS Molded-Case Switch Current Ratings

Molded Case

Switch Frame

SE-Frame

SF-Frame

SG-Frame

SK-Frame

Maximum

Ampere Rating

100 & 150

250

400 & 600

800 & 1200

H3

H



HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches

Construction Features

GE Type HPC switches are UL Listed in accordance with Standard

977, Fused Power Circuit Devices. The over-center toggle mechanism provides stored energy, quick-make/quick-break operation.

Multiple spring-loaded high-pressure current-carrying contact arms and an arcing contact arm provide excellent current carrying capability without sacrificing high interrupting fault performance.

These switches can interrupt, on a make and break basis, a minimum of 12 times their nameplate rating without fuse assistance at

600 volts AC. Complete HPC switch and Class L fuse coordination is therefore achieved for all levels of fault current up to 200,000

RMS amperes symmetrical at 600 volts AC maximum. Type HPC switches used as service disconnects comply with the National

Electrical Code Article 230-98 and Article 230-95 for adequate short-circuit current and ground-fault protection. HPC switches with integral ground fault, when provided with 120 volts AC external control power, permit compliance with NEC Article 230-95, which requires ground-fault protection system testing when first installed.

• High Durability–Safety of Operation–High dielectric strength, glass reinforced insulating case.

• High Interrupting capability–Arc chute of unique construction suppresses arcs and cools gases rapidly, providing quick arc interruption and extended switch life.

• High Transient Voltage withstandability– Interphase partitions mesh with switch cover to completely isolate each pole.

• Extended switch life–Preloaded constant pressure pivot eliminates braid whip and fraying on high short-circuit currents and repeated operations.

• Positive “ON-OFF” indication–Green (OFF), Red (ON), eliminates any question about the position of the switch contacts.

• Easy operation–Quick Make–Extra-heavy-duty, low-torque rotary-operated closing mechanism. L-handle 800-1600 amperes; T-handle 2000 amperes.

• Emergency open–Quick Break–Finger-tip “OFF” button instantly opens the breaker contacts.

• Positive Door and switch interlocking–Separate fuse access door is not required.

• Fuse mounting bolts with captive washers–For ease of mounting fuses.

Product Forms

• Top feed–Line terminals at top of switch.

• Bottom Feed–Line terminals at bottom of switch; fuses are de-energized when switch is in OFF position. Same size as top feed.

Options Available

• Manual Operation–For manual, high-interrupting capacity disconnects not requiring remote tripping and/or groundfault protection.

• Integral ground fault–Incorporates a solid-state, inversetime and fixed-time response. Ground-fault function is selfpowered and has field-adjustable ground-fault current and delay time settings for maximum coordination and selectivity. Through 3000 amperes, switches with integral ground fault are the same size as manual switches.

HPC switch with integral ground fault

Manual HPC switch

• Electric Trip–For remote tripping or for use with Ground-

Break ® components. All 800-2000 ampere electric trip switches are the same size as manual devices.

• Blown-Fuse Protector–Provides single-phase protection by tripping switch when a fuse blows or when switch is closed with a blown fuse or no fuse installed. Suitable for system voltage of 208 to 480 volts AC. Mounted internally. Does not provide protection of single-phasing of the power source.

• Auxiliary switch–Provides remote indication of main contact position.

Switch elements are Type “AB,” single-pole, double-throw.

Switch element ratings are 0.25 amperes at 250 volts DC; 0.5

amperes at 125 volts DC; 6.0 amperes at 240 volts AC.

Ground-fault pickup and Delay Time-current curves

H4

H

H5



Power BreakII Insulated Case Circuit Breakers

General Description

The GE line of Power Break II insulated case circuit breakers offers the rugged, reliable type of system protection critical for heavyduty applications. Power Break circuit breakers are rated up to

200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity without fuses or current limiters. The Power Break II design consists of two physical envelope sizes: 800, 1600, 2000, 2500; and 3000,

4000 Amp. frame sizes.

Power Break II is a versatile breaker, designed for a wide variety of applications with features such as temperature insensitive trip units, push-to-open and -close buttons, standard padlocking provision, maximum three-cycle closing time, field installable rating plugs to change ampere ratings, UL listing, plug in field installable accessories, and easy-to-operate two stage pumphandle, stored-energy operating mechanism capable of change after close.

MicroVersaTrip Plus Trip Unit

The enhanced MicroVersaTrip Plus trip units utilize a digital, LCD display with a five-button keypad to provide local set-up and readout of trip settings. A built-in battery allows cold set-up (no phase or control power required). A three-phase ammeter and trip indicators are standard, as is a hinged plastic cover with provisions for sealing to allow tamper-resistant installation. The trip unit digitally measures the current waveform in each phase to determine the true RMS value of the current, regardless of the waveshape.

MicroVersaTrip Plus trip units provide accurate, predictable overload and short circuit protection for distribution systems that include variable speed drives, rectifiers, induction heating, and other loads that cause high harmonic distortion as well as standard circuits. They provide maximum breaker-to-breaker selectivity and custom load protection. Short-time and ground fault functions include the flexibility of coordination with or without an l

2 t ramp and are also available with high range instantaneous.

Standard

MicroVersaTrip PM Trip Unit

The MicroVersaTrip PM trip unit adds power management system capability, including advanced metering, and protective relays to the basic functions of the MicroVersaTrip Plus. MicroVersaTrip PM trip units communicate directly on the GE Power Leader communications bus (commnet).

Options

• Power Leader Communication System Link with user-selectable address assignment for Commnet communications.

• Metering.

Delta systems.

• Adjustable Long-Time (L) pickup, 0.5-1.0X, with four delay bands.

• Adjustable instantaneous (I) pickup, 1.5-10X without short time, 15X with short time–thru 2500A and 13X for 2500A.

• Local Overload, Short Circuit, and Short-Time Trip Indicators with overload pickup warning.

• Test set initiated trip indication.

Options

• Adjustable Short-Time (S) pickup, 1.0-9.0C, and delay (3 bands) with l

2 t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator

• Adjustable Ground Fault (G) pickup, 02.-0.6S, and delay (3 bands) with l

2 t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator.

• Adjustable High range instantaneous (H) multiples of shorttime rating.

• Zone Selective Interlocking for ground fault (Z1) or ground fault and short time (Z2).

• Protective Relaying—User selectable in any combination from 1 to 5 relays

—Current Unbalance Relay

• Adjustable pickup, 10-50%

• Adjustable delay, 1-15 seconds, OFF

—Undervoltage Relay


• Adjustable pickup, 1-15 seconds, OFF

—Overvoltage Relay


• Adjustable pickup, 1-15 seconds, OFF

—Voltage Unbalance Relay



—Power Reversal Relay

• Adjustable pickup, .01-3.00 per unit




Spectra RMS Circuit Breakers and THED/TEDL Circuit Breakers

Features

Spectra RMS

SE150, SF250, SG600 and SK1200 circuit breaker frames have a digital, solid state, RMS sensing trip system with field installable, front-mounted rating plugs to establish or change the breaker ampere rating. Adjustable instantaneous with tracking short-time is standard on all frames including SE150.

MicroVersaTrip Plus Trip System

SG600 and SK1200 are optionally available with the

MicroVersaTrip Plus trip system which offers expanded functionality in the same space-saving size of standard Spectra RMS breakers: able rating plug establishes the instantaneous pickup range (with tracking short-time) but does not change the frame ampere rating.

• Spectra RMS molded case switches have a fixed, high-set instantaneous trip (without tracking short-time function) and have short circuit withstand ratings equal to their equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating in most cases.

• RMS breakers are ambient insensitive. Trip times will not vary over the range 10-50° breaker ambient.

• Spectra RMS breakers contain no parts that would support fungus growth and are, therefore, inherently fungusproof.

Standard

• 3-phase Ammeter with ±4% accuracy.

• Adjustable Long Time (L) pickup, 0.5-1.0X, and delay (3-4 bands).

• Adjustable Instantaneous (l) pickup, 1.5-10X.

• Local Overload and Short Circuit Trip Indicators (T) with overload pickup warning.

• Interchangeable trip rating plugs with test set jack for

TVRMS test set.

• Digital LCD display with four-button keypad for function selection and set point adjustment and sealable, clear

Lexan ® cover for tamper-resistant settings.

• True RMS sensing for accurate response to high harmonic content waveforms.

• EMI immunity per ANSI C37.90.

Other MCCB Features

• Broad product line to meet virtually any application need.

• Reduced downtime. A tripped breaker is easily spotted and can be immediately reset after the fault has been corrected.

• Eliminates single phasing. A common trip bar disconnects all poles simultaneously on both overloads and short circuits.

• Offers application flexibility through the use of a wide variety of accessory devices and special attachments.

• Repetitive operation — no fuses to replace.

• Breakers can be repetitively tested. Fuses must be destroyed to confirm calibration accuracy.

Optional

• Adjustable Short Time (S) pickup, 1.0-9.0C, and delay (4 bands) with I

2 t ON/OFF selection.

• Adjustable Ground fault (G) pickup, 0.2-1.0S, and delay

(4 bands) with I 2 t ON/OFF selection and trip indicator.

The 4 short time and ground fault delay bands provide broader system selectivity.

A complete circuit breaker consists of a UL Listed circuit breaker frame and a rating plug (UL Listed interchangeable trip breaker unit). Terminal lugs for cable connection are available if required.

• All frames use the same UL listed, field installable internal accessories (auxiliary switch, shunt trip, undervoltage release and bell alarm).

• All frame sizes have maximum UL listed interrupting ratings of 200 kA @ 240 volts AC and 100 kA @ 480 volts

AC with 600 volts AC ratings to 65 kA depending on frame size. UL listed current limiting versions are provided through the SG600 frame for the 65 kA @480 volts AC and the 100 kA @ 480 volts AC models, with no increase in physical frame size.

• Spectra RMS Mag-Break instantaneous-only motor circuit protectors also use the same digital, solid state trip unit and rating plugs as the circuit breakers. The interchange-

Reference – GET-7002 for further application information.

THED/TEDL Circuit Breakers

Made similar to the Mag-Break TEC with TECL limiter, the THED with appropriate TEDL limiter provides a thermal magnetic breaker, UL listed with 100 kAIC short circuit ratings through

600 Volts.

The add-on limiter coordinates with the THED’s thermal magnetic trip to allow normal tripping functions at standard ratings with backup limiting at high short-circuit levels.

THED Trip

15

20

30-60

70-100

TEDL

TEDL36015

TEDL36020

TEDL36060

TEDL36100

H6

H



H7

Ground Break Systems

Type TGSR Protective Equipment

Description

The Ground Break system of solid-state ground fault signaling relays, sensors and monitor panels provides a new dimension in power-system protection. These components can be combined to operate at lower magnitudes of ground-fault current and shorter time delays than conventional over-current protective devices. The built-in memory function integrates intermittent faults with time providing protection against low-level arcing faults. The components which comprise a complete system are:

Solid-State Relay

Used in conjunction with devices having an electric trip, or shunt trip, this relay will sense ground currents and cause the interrupter to open when these currents reach a preselected value for a preselected length of time. Optional zone selecting interlocking is available for a fully coordinated system. This type of relay initiates an instantaneous trip when a fault occurs in its own zone. In addition, it will block upstream zone selective relays for a pre-set delay time to allow the downstream breaker to clear the fault.

Monitor Panel

Provides a ground fault indicator, control power indicator and TEST and RESET buttons. The control circuitry offers the ability to test the complete Ground Break system with or without tripping the interrupter.

Current Sensor

Solid- or split-core construction for easy installation, includes an integral test winding for checkout of the complete system. A large variety of window sizes are available.

System Selection Guide

Sensors may be used 1 per phase or any other combination. For this type of use all outputs except “T” should be connected in parallel. When sensors are used more than 1 per circuit the thermal rating (current) must not be less than the maximum phase current.

• Maximum ground and phase fault current withstanding ratings

200,000 amperes for 0.1 second

60,000 amperes for 1.0 second

• Thermal ratings (maximum continuous current which can exist without overheating the sensor)

TGM Sensors–600 amperes

TGS0002–1600 amperes

TGS0005–2500 amperes

• Dielectric withstand:

Windings to mounting bushings–1.5 kV

Windings to CT window surface–2.2 kV

Mounting bushings to CT window surface–2.2 kV

• Current Transformer Ratio–800:1 except type TGM

• Integral Test Winding Ratio–1:700 except type TGM

Features

• Current Transformer Insulation–cast Epoxy all sizes

• UL recognized, File E51048

• Instantaneous zone-selective trip for optimum system coordination and protection.

• Heavy-duty design permits direct operation of electric trip and alarm devices without external relays.

• Dependable operation–solid-state relay, cast insulated sensor.

Solid state relay Current sensor Motor panel

• Two NO contacts, one of which is electrically isolated from the electronic device.

•

Output contact rating 5 amperes continuous, 30 amperes inrush, up to 240 volts AC or 125 volts DC.

• Adjustable pickup and delay time.

• Memory function for system protection against intermittent arcing faults.

Relays

Adjustable

Control

Voltage

120 VAC

125 VDC

48 VDC

36 VDC

24 VDC

120 VAC

125 VDC

48 VDC

36 VDC

24 VDC

100

100

100

100

100

5

5

5

5

LO

5

Trip Range

Amperes

HI

60

60

60

60

60

1200

1200

1200

1200

1200

Standard

Catalog

Number

TGSR06

TGSR06

TGSR06B

TGSR06C

TGSR06D

TGSR12

TGSR12

TGSR12B

TGSR12C

TGSR12D

Zone Selective

Catalog

Number

TGR06Z

TGSR06Z

TGSR06BZ

TGSR06CZ

TGSR06DZ

TGSR12Z

TGSR12Z

TGSR12BZ

TGSR12CZ

TGSR12DZ

Monitor Panels

➀

Control

Voltage

120 VAC

125 VDC

48 VDC

36 VDC

24 VDC

Window

Diameter

(Inches)

21/2

5

8

4 X 8

4 X 18

4 X 24

4 X 32

8 X 8

8 X 10

8 X 18

8 X 24

8 X 32

8 X 38

11 X 13

Catalog

Number

TGS0002

TGS0005

TGS0008

TGS0408

TGS0418

TGS0424

TGS0432

TGS0808

TGS0810

TGS0818

TGS0824

TGS0832

TGS0838

TGS1113

With GP

Indicator Light

Catalog Number

TGSMP

TGSMPA

TGSMPB

TGSMPC

TGSMPD

Round-

Solid Core

Rectangular-

Split Core

With Mechanical

Target GF Indicator

Catalog Number

TGSMA

............

............

............

............

①

Monitor panel requires 120 volts AC for system test function.

Current Sensors

Construction

Test

Winding

Yes

Yes



Ground Break Systems

Type GFM Ground Fault System

U.L. Listed File no. E110395

Self powered.

Temperature Range: -30°C. to +75°C.

Positive “ON” (Green) and “OFF” (Red) condition indication, manual reset.

Instantaneous only (GFM-252)-standard

Time delay from instantaneous to 36 cycles (GFM-262).

Trip currents from 3.8 to 18 amperes (size 1 to 4 starters)

5 to 20 amperes (size 5, 6, 7 starters)

General

These Class 1 Model GFM Ground Fault protection systems are designed to minimize damage or loss to equipment caused by destructive arcing ground faults. This GFM system is designed for all polyphase applications and is ideally suited for motor control, motor control centers, and high voltage starters. Systems can be wye or delta, grounded or resistance grounded. When the ground fault current exceeds a preselected condition (current only, or current and time settings) the relay trips. The relay contacts can be connected in the control circuit of a motor starter, to the shunt trip of a circuit breaker or similar disconnecting or alarm devices. The system has an inverse time characteristic to prevent nuisance tripping.

The relay tripping current value is field adjustable over the trip current range of the sensor. The adjustable trip time delay relay, when specified, is field settable up to 36 cycles.

Model GFM-252, 262

Contacts rated 10 Amps continuous, 23

Amps inrush, 120 Volts AC

1.17"

2.00"

.86"

3.30"

0.50"

2.50"

1.15"

1.18"

0.46"

0.46"

3

8

10

1

12

2.25" 0.35"

#6-32X.35LG.

TERMINAL SCREWS

3

1

Model

Number

Trip

➀

Current

GFM 156 3.8 to 18

3.53"

2.75"

(4) 0.31X0.21

OPEN SLOTS

To current Sensor X1 and X2 All contacts shown with the relay in the tripped position

8

10

12

1.77"

3.00"

1.56" DIA

1.77"

1.09" 2.15"

0.44"

3.65"

1.83

Model

Number

Trip

➀

Current

GFM 3P208 5 to 20

4.6"

①

Trip current tolerance is ± 15 percent.

3.5"

LABEL

10.75"

GFX2 GFX1

2.0"

H1

3.75"

Typical Circuit

L1 L2 L3

1

(2)

STAB

(3)

L3

(2)

L2

(1)

L1

(5) (6)

K3

(3)

CB

OR

(4)

(1)

LSW

(2)

K2

K1

(1)

(5)

(3)

(1)

(3)

2FU

M

(6)

(4)

(2)

1FU

(1)

X1

(2)

(H1)

(4)

T

(X1)

(H2)

(X2)

Gnd

X2

(5)

OL

(6)

K6

(3)

K5

(4)

(1)

K4

(2)

(H1)

8CT.

(FX1)

G1

T3

T2

(1)

(FX2)

G2

T1

GFR

(3)

GFR

(10) (9)

1A

(13)

SW PB

Hand Auto

OFF

(14)

3

M

(A) (B)

48

OL

(7) (8)

49

MOTOR

(15) x=Closed(MC)

(16)

5

2

R

(1) (2)

PB

H8

H

H9



300-Line Motor Starters

The 300-Line starter is a full-voltage, magnetic motor starter with encapsulated coil and three-leg block overload relay with visual trip indicator, manual reset and manual weld check. It incorporates all the features and benefits most asked for by users and has received standard specification approval by many major manufacturers. In addition to the basic non-reversing form, the 300-Line is available in reversing, two-speed and combination forms in NEMA Sizes 00-5.

The 300-Line’s toolless contactor disassembly allows quick access for inspection and maintenance. Simply release two coil retainers and pull the spring clip from the “I” magnet to gain access to the magnet, coil and contacts. No need to remove any wiring.

Improved

Auxiliary

Contacts

Rated for

Heavy

Pilot-Duty

Optional terminals can be provided to permit the easy connection of power factor correction capacitors for energy conservation.

Manual Weld

Check

Overload Trip

Adjustment

±10%

Visual Trip

Indication

Optional N.O. Isolated

High Fidelity Contacts

Staggered Saddle

Clamp Terminals with Permanent

Terminal

Identification

Quick

Contact

Inspection and Coil

Change

GE

Exclusive

Dual

Bimetal

Overload

Protection

The molded coil is impervious to moisture, dirt and oil. It is highly resistant to mechanical damage and high-humidity failure.

Retaining clips engage detents encapsulated in the coil to hold it securely in place.




(Cover removed)

Where it’s essential to monitor performance or diagnose faults, a 300-Line starter may be ordered with an additional isolated, high-fidelity, normally-open contact on the overload relay. This contact may be used for direct input to a programmable controller or direct interface with a computer.

All line and load terminals on NEMA Size 00, 0 and

1 starters have saddle clamps to accommodate all types of terminations– ring, spade and strippedwire. Terminal numbering is permanently stamped, and terminals are staggered to help prevent shorting. NEMA

Size 2, 3 and 4 starters are also available with provision for ring terminations with staggered terminals. Size 5 starters are available with provision for ring terminations. In-line terminals for spade and stripped-wire connections are standard.

On NEMA Size 1 starters and larger, contact tips are weldresistant with cool operation and extended life. The contacts have a wedge-shaped configuration for positive make with minimum bounce. They can be easily changed from normally open to normally closed without additional parts on Sizes 0 and 1.

Magnet provides long life and is specially treated to resist rust.

The overload relay can be manually tripped deliberately as a convenient way to check against contact welding. Depressing the manual weld check arm trips the relay.

Then a welded contact can be detected with a simple continuity check.

Components

Overriding is eliminated because overload reset occurs only when the reset arm is released on the standard manual-reset form.

A bright yellow visual trip indicator tells operators at a glance if the overload has tripped. An optional automatic-reset overload relay is available for special applications upon request.

Overload relay heaters are completely interchangeable with heaters for 200- and 100-Line starters, eliminating the need to stock different heaters.

Relay trip points are factory calibrated at given currents for high accuracy. For added flexibility, the trip current of the relay is protection to any given motor and to eliminate nuisance tripping. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. The overload relay is available in standard or ambient-compensated forms.

Each auxiliary contact is rated 10 amperes AC, continuous current

(NEMA A600), and is suitable for either right or left side mounting. All necessary parts are supplied in the modification kit for easy installation.

An insulating shield is also provided for use between each auxiliary contact unit and the starter.

Auxiliary contact kits offered include one with a basic contact block and one with an adder block. The basic block is supplied with either a single circuit (one normally open contact or one normally closed contact) or a double circuit (one normally open and one normally closed contact). The adder block must be used in conjunction with a basic block. It may be ordered with either one normally open or one normally closed contact.

H

H10

H11




Description

NEMA Size

Type

Protection Class

Ambient Compensation

Phase loss protection

Phase unbalance

Ground Fault

Self Powered

Accuracy

Repeatability

Thermal Memory

FLA Adj. Range

Reset Mode

Trip Test

Trip Indication

FVNR, FVR

2 Speed, 1 & 2 Winding

Operating Temp. Range

Communications

Addressable

Power Leader

Compatible

Heater Required

PFC Terminals

PLC Compatible Contacts

Aux. Contacts

Reference Publication

CR324 Thermal

Overload Relay

Standard factory assembled 8000-Line

MCCs use GE NEMA 300-Line Starters, which utilize CR324 Thermal bimetal overload relays and fused or circuit breaker protective devices. Bimetal overload relays use interchangeable match overload relays to motor amps. A ±10 trip adjustment dial is used to fine tune the motor overload relays. Overload relay features include trip test, manual reset on upstroke, weld check visible trip indicator and an optional normally - open signal contact.

1–6

Thermal bimetal

20

Optional

No

No

No

Yes

±5%

±3%

Yes

1.25:1

Manual (auto optional)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0° to 55°C

No

No

No

Yes

Yes (optional through

NEMA Size 2)

No

NC (NO optional)

—

CR324X Electronic

Overload Relay

The CR324C advanced electronic overload relay replaces the traditional CR324 bimetal overload relays in motor control centers.

The electronic overload relay eliminates the need for heater elements, providing a broader amperage adjustment range. Other phase loss protection, adjustable phase unbalance, selectable class range, and higher accuracy and repeatability.

Provisions for increased diagnostic capabilities permit automation control via auxiliary contacts and remote reset open collector.

Mounting dimensions are identical to the

CR324 Thermal Overload Relays and permit fast, simple upgrading in the field.

Spectra RMS Electronic

Control Module

The Electronic Control Module uses Spectra

RMS E, F, G, & K circuit motor protectors with a module to provide advanced motor protection. The module features phase loss unbalance, selectable ground fault, selectable phase unbalance, communications, unit accuracy and compatibility with GE

Power Leader System Modules. Adjustment range is accomplished merely by changing the table without removing the power wiring. The Electronic Control Module is compatible with all existing MCC Spectra

RMS installations. For Display and Keypad, see H-12

1–6

Electronic

10, 20, 30 (selectable)

Ambient insensitive

Standard (fixed)

Adjustable 20–50%

No

Yes

±2%

±2%

Yes

2:1

Manual

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

–20° to 70°C

No

No

No

No

Yes (optional through

NEMA Size 2)

Yes

NO, NC

DEA-015

1–6

Electronic

10, 20, 30 (selectable)

Ambient insensitive

Selectable (On–Off)

Selectable (On–Off)

Fixed at 25%

Yes (5A, Zero sequence)

No (120V source required)

±2%

±1%

Yes

2:1

Manual

Yes, with commnet

(digital self-diagnostics)

Yes, with commnet (last fault diagnostics)

Yes

No

–20° to 80°C

Yes, with commnet

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes, with commnet

NO, NC

DET-069



Spectra ECM™ Electronic Control Module

Module & Accessories for Motor Protection and Control

RJ45 Connection to Spectra ECM

Break-away Tab exposes switch to enable auto-restart feature

Spectra ECM Control Module with rating plug harness connection for Spectra RMS molded-case circuit breaker

Overview

The Spectra ECM is a microprocessor-based digital device which provides advanced motor protection, control and communications capability for full-voltage non-reversing (FVNR) and reversing (FVR) combination starter applications.

The ECM is available exclusively with Spectra RMS E-, F-, G-, and K-Frame molded-case circuit breakers. Integral to the system is a special rating plug harness connecting the rating plug of the Spectra RMS circuit breaker to the ECM, providing the module with three-phase RMS current sensing capability.

Enhanced Product Functionality

Capable of one or two contactor control, elapsed run time monitoring, enhanced trip notification, and undervoltage protection.

Compatible with both POWER LEADER™ and SDS™ communications systems.

Product Features

• Available for NEMA Starter Sizes 1 through 6 in threephase FVNR and FVR applications.

• Electronic overload protection with 3:1 current adjustability.

• User selectable motor protection classes 10, 20, 30.

• Phase current unbalance/loss protection.

• Undervoltage protection.

• Equipment ground fault protection with external zero sequence current transformer.

• Thermal model tracks motor heating characteristics.

• Built-in self-test digital electronics.

• Supports both local/remote control interfaces.

• DeviceNet ➀ , POWER LEADER and SDS compatible

Spectra ECM Display Accessory

• 2 line 16 character alphanumeric LCD local display showing:

– ECM settings–overload, ground fault, and phase loss/ unbalance protection settings, communications address.

– Motor and ECM status information (START/STOP/RUN etc.)

– Trip indication and pre-trip current information.

– Metering–individual and average phase currents, elapsed motor run time, motor load, phase unbalance, ground current, control voltage.

2 Line, 16

Character LCD

Display

LCD

Contrast

Adjustment

Spectra ECM Control

• Five controllers for FVNR and FVR applications:

HAND/OFF/AUTO

START/STOP

HAND/OFF/AUTO/START/STOP

FWD/REV/STOP

FWD/REV/AUTO/OFF

• Motor status and trip indication LEDs.

• Maintained or Instantaneous selection.

Spectra ECM Pin Assignments

120 VAC Neutral

120 VAC Power

Chassis Ground

Contactor 1 Sense

Contactor 2 Sense

Breaker Sense

Contactor 1 Drive

Ready Indicator Drive

Contactor 2 Drive

Future

Run1

Run 2

Reset

Remote Control Enable

Ground Fault CT

Ground Fault CT

Backet

TB

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

Wireway

TB

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

120 VAC Neutral

120 VAC Power

Trip Status Common

Trip Status Relay-No

Trip Status Relay-NC

CAN Communications +

CAN Communications -

Commnet -/CAN Communications

Commnet +

Remote Reset

Remote Run 1

Remote Run 2

Communications Enable

External Control Common

CAN Communications Power future

External wiring notes:

• Pin 19 Auto must have 120V to enable the remote control

(Key Pad in Auto)

• Pin 14 is common neutral for 10, 11, 12 & 13, jumper pin 14 to 1 if common source.

• Pins 2 & 13 need to be connected to enable communication control (120V input)

• SECMOD02 has Commnet communication use Pins -8 &

+9, selfpowered

• SECMOD03 has SDS/CAN Communication use Pins +6

& - 7, (requires 24V DC, Pins 8 Neg. & 15 Plus)

• SECMOD04 has DeviceNet/CAN Communication use

Pins+6 & -7, (requires 24V DC, Pin 8 is Neg. & 15 Plus)

Factory defaults: FLA = Minimum, Class = 20, Phase Unbalance

= ON, GF=OFF unless ordered with GF sensor, Communication address = 000.

Reference: GEH-6435A, DEH-40125, DEH-035

Control Keys

①

ODVA approved.

H12

H

H13



Mini-Contactors

C-2000™ Control Relays

The C-2000 Control Relay is a compact, industrial style relay designed for heavyduty applications where reliability and versatility are required.

Front-Mount Auxiliary Contact Blocks

1NO or 1NC

Front-mount auxiliary contact blocks clip into front face of control relay.

Basic forms: 4 NO; 3NO-1NC; 2NO-2NC; 4 NC

Max front mounted aux. contacts: 4 (NO or NC)

Contact Rating: A600; P600

Aux. Contact Rating: A600; Q600; P300

Timer Contact Rating: A600; P600

Coil Data

AC DC

Voltage Voltage

Burden

Inrush

Holding

Pickup Voltage (% of Coil Volts)

Drop-Out Voltage (% of Coil Volts)

Switching Delay (ms)

Switching Delay on

Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%

Coil Voltage at Rated Value

Switching Delay off

Coil Voltage at +10% to -20%

Coil Voltage at Rated Value

Maximum Operations per Hour

No Load

Rated load

45 VA

6 VA

85-110

40-55

6-25

8-20

6-13

6-13

9000

1200

5.5 W

5.5 W

80-110

20-40

35-65

40-45

30-60

30-60

3600

1200

Coil Rating

AC Coil Rating

24V/60 Hz

48V/60 Hz

24V/50 Hz

42V/50 Hz

120V/60 Hz

208V/60 Hz

240V/60 Hz

240V/60 Hz

110V/50 Hz

190V/50 Hz

220V/50 Hz

220V/50 Hz

277V/60 Hz

–

–

480V/60 Hz

600V/60 Hz

240V/50 Hz

380V/50 Hz

415V/50 Hz

440V/50 Hz

550V/50 Hz

DC Coil Rating

24VDC

48VDC

125VDC

250VDC

Contact Ratings

Continuous Thermal Current

Max. VA/Amps Making

Max. VA/Amps Breaking

Max. Operating Voltage

A600

10A

600VAC

P600

5A

7200VA/60A 138VA

720VA/6A 138VA

Q600

2.5A

69VA

69VA

P300

5A

138VA

138VA

600VDC 600VDC 300VDC

Pneumatic Timers

Pneumatic timers are adjustable time-delayed auxiliary contacts.

They come equipped with two time-delayed contacts: 1NO or

1 NC, electrically separated.

Setting is scaled over a 350° rotation by means of a knurled knob with timing guide marks. To mount a pneumatic timer, simply clip it on front face of control relay.

Type

Time

Delay On

Time

Delay Off

3.19

81

.195

5

Range

.1-30 sec

1-60

.1-30 sec.

1-60 sec

1.38

35

.18

4.5

TYP.

Contacts

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

1NO-1NC

Surge Suppressor

For suppression of disturbances on electronic circuits due to the coil transient voltage occurring on opening of the contactor.

Control Relay - Front View AC Control Relay - Side View

1.77

45

5.55

141

4.49

1114

3.35

85

E

C

B



CR120B Machine Tool and Industrial Relays

The CR120B and CR120BL, Series A, multi-circuit industrial relays are designed to meet most panel application requirements. They are available as standard or latched relays.

All forms of the relay mount on the same base and in the same small panel-mounting area. Relays may be arranged in any configuration or modified on a panel without altering the mounting area.

Features

• Bifurcated contacts assure positive make–unique bifurcated contacts assure positive make at all voltages and give excellent fidelity even in harsh environments.

• Transparent Lexan contact cartridges–allow inspection of contacts.

• Convertible contacts–allow conversion from normally open to normally closed, or vice versa. Just change the terminal screws and invert the contact module.

• Quick-change coil–can be changed without removing any screws.

Latch Attachment

The latch attachment mounts on any standard CR120B relay in the same manner as a deck adder.

AC Relay coil

AC Unlatch coil

DC Relay coil

Inrush VA

120

31

235

Sealed VA

15

15

2.8

Sealed Watts

7

9.2

2.8

CR120B standard AC relay

Contact Ratings

Type of

Max.

AC

Contacts Voltage

Inst.

➀

Delay

600

600

Max.Continuous

Max. AC

Voltampere

Max. AC Max. DC

Rating Rating

Max. DC

Voltampere

Rating

Rating Amps Amps

Amps Make Break Make Break 125V 250V

Rating

300V or less

10

5

7200 720

3600 360

60

30

6

3

1.1

0.5

0.55

–

138

–

① Use for CR120B and CR122BT contact rating.

Coil Data

60 Hz

50 Hz

DC

24V 115V 120V 200V 208V 230V 460V 575V 600V

24V 110V 220V 380V 440V 550V

12V 24V 48V 54V 125V

CR7R Industrial Timing Control Relay

The CR7R industrial control timing relay is a compact relay designed for heavy-duty industrial control applications where reliability and versatility are required.

• Compact mounting dimensions

• Mounted on vertical plane

• Straight-through wiring

• Easy coil replacement

• Long contact life

• High operating speed

• Silver alloy contacts

• Tropicalized throughout

• Captive terminals

• Rated 600 volts

• UL Listed

• Pull-in volts

• Drop-out volts

• Mechanical Life

• Contact Life

Min. 85% Rated Voltage

50% or less Rated Voltage

In excess of 10 Mill. OPS

In excess of 1 Mill. OPS

Relay Contacts

Contact

Arrangement

4 NO

3 NO, 1 NC

2 NO, 2 NC

Timer Contacts

NO, 1 NC Time-Delay Contacts

Delay Range

(Convertible)

TDE/TDD

TDE/TDD

(Seconds)

0.3–30

10.0–180

Contact Ratings –

For Relay Contacts and Timer Contacts

Max.

AC

Max.

Max. AC

Continuous Voltamperes

Max. AC

Amperes

Max. DC Amperes –

Relay

Break or Make

Timer

Voltage Amperes Make Break Make Break 24V 125V 250V 24V 125V 250V

600 10 7200 720 60 6 5.0 1.1 0.55 2.5 .55 .27

Coil Ratings

AC Coil Rating

24V/60 Hz

48V/60 Hz

24V/50 Hz

48V/50 Hz

120V/60 Hz 110V/50 Hz

208V/60 Hz 190V/50 Hz

240V/60 Hz 220V/50 Hz

277V/60 Hz 240V/50 Hz

..................

380V/50 Hz

..................

415V/50 Hz

480V/60 Hz 440V/50 Hz

600V/60 Hz 550V/50 Hz

DC Coil Rating

24 VDC

48 VDC

125 VDC

250 VDC

AC Inrush

VA

55

DC Inrush

W

8.5

Holding

VA

9

Holding

W

8.5

H14

H

H15



CR104P Pilot Devices

Description

Newly-designed nameplates with chrome-plated octagonal rings project an attractive, quality appearance. Positive feel selector switches give a quality touch in all illuminated, solid color, spring return, and maintained units.

Standard and illuminated push buttons and selector switches are available. Both push button and selector switches are available with key or for conventional operation. The CR104P push-button line also includes press-to-test and standard indicating lights, mushroom-head, joy stick, push-pull and push-push operators.

Application

Especially adapted to machine-tool service or any application where oil or coolant is present. The convenient one-hole mounting makes this line suitable for general purpose use in equipment of all kinds where panel mounting is possible. This line is ideal for applications where oil tightness, watertightness and long life are essential.

All units are suitable for use in Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 12 and 13 environments when mounted in enclosures rated for those same applications.

➀

Features

• Ease of assembly–One screw contact block mounting.

Octagonal ring provides ease in front panel mounting and enclosure applications.

• Greater torque–Due to the eight-sided ring design, greater torque can be developed during assembly and installation to provide oil tightness.

• Stocking inventories reduced–Forms may be furnished as complete units or as components, allowing building block construction from a minimum of stock.

• Color Coded–Colored knobs and caps are available in kit forms for easy field conversion.

CR104P pilot lights

Pilot lights match appearance of switches above. Standard applications use full voltage or transformer type lights. Optional nameplates match those used with switches, neon lights are available (with limited lens colors).

Contact Ratings

AC Ratings, NEMA A600 Heavy Pilot Duty

Max. Ac

600

Continuous

Current

Amps

10

AC Voltamperes

@ 60/50 Hz

➁

Make

7200

Break

720

DC Ratings, NEMA P600

Max. Make or Break Amps

125V 250V 600V

1.1

0.55

0.2

➀ CR104PTP units are suitable for Type 1,12, and 13 applications only.

➁

Maximum make and break currents are 60 and 6 amperes respectively for voltages of 120 and below.

C-2000 Pilot Device

Type

Full Voltage

(120 VAC)

Transformer

(6 VAC

Secondary)

STD

X

X

Neon

LED

(Transformer

Type only)

X

X

Push-To-Test

X

Bulb

#120PSB

X

N/A

X

#755

Neon

LED

(6 Volt)

White

Amber

Clear

Red

Green

Blue

Amber

Color

Red

Green

Amber

Blue

White

Clear

Red

Standard for

1

⁄

2

X Starter. See GEP-1260, Section 9.



Solid-State Motor Winding Heater

Description

The motor winding heater is designed for use with 3-phase ac motors to guard against damage caused by condensation buildup on motor windings, which can occur in high-humidity environments during motor idle periods. With the heater connected as indicated in the connection diagram, and the motor not running, an SCR controlled current flows in the motor windings, producing enough heat to maintain the temperature inside the motor above the ambient temperature. The motor winding heater is automatically energized after the starter contacts (M) open, and de-energized when the starter contacts close. Fuses are included for SCR overcurrent protection and protection for wiring.

If desired, a pilot light can be connected as shown (“Fuse

Condition Indicator”) to visually monitor the condition of the fuses. With the starter contacts open, the light will be On if current paths through FU1 and FU2 are complete. The pilot light should have a line voltage rating.

Specifications

Output Voltage Regulation: Voltage applied to motor winding will

Applications

50 Hertz Applications: The 230/460 volt device can be used at

220/440 volts, 50 Hertz. The 575 volt device can be used at

550 volts, 50 Hertz.

Typical Wiring Diagram

Note: Since voltage is present at motor terminals at all times, cautionary information sent with the device must be observed.

Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to +50°C.

Fusing: FU1–Fast-acting semiconductor fuse for SCR overcurrent protection. FU2–Class RK-5 rejection type fuse with time delay for wiring protection.

Additional SCR Protection: Metal oxide varistor protects against voltage surges. RC snubber circuit limits rate of change of circuit voltage.

Motor Voltage

+10%, –15%

3-Phase 60 Hz

230/460V

575V

Motor Horsepower

Range

15-400 Hp

25-400 Hp

Heater is UL Listed in MCC Construction

H

H16

H17



Power Leader EPM

General

The Power Leader EPM is a microprocessor based device that displays a full range of over 50 metered values with revenue class accuracy of 0.5%. The PLEPM is available with a communication option that is factory- or field-installable so that all data can be transmitted to a remote host computer.

Features

The PLEPM comes in a panel mount version standard or an optional S1 case. Metered values cover a full range of parameters.

Revenue Class accuracy of 0.5%.

Optional communications provides connectivity to POWER

LEADER network (commnet) and Modbus RTU.

Pulse initiation option with programmable outputs.

Amps

Volts

Watts

Energy

Volt-Amps

KVARs

Power Factor

Frequency

(kwh, kvarh, kvah, kqh)

3 phase and neutral (0.25% accuracy)

L-L & L-N (0.25% accuracy)

(per phase, 3 phase total, peak watts, watt demand,

& watts at maximum KVA)

(kwh, kvah, kvarh lag and lead, and KQH)

(per phase, 3 phase total, peak KVA, & KVA demand)

(per phase, 3 phase total, peak KVAR, peak KVAR lead, KVAR demand, KVAR demand lead)

(per phase, 3 phase total, average, power factor at previous interval, power factor at maximum KVA)

(60 Hz only)

Inputs

The PLEPM requires CT inputs with a 5A secondary current. The meter can accept direct input voltages up to 600V and is selfpowered from the voltage inputs. Three CTs are required for four wire (Y) systems and two CTs are required for three wire

(

∆

) system.

5.69"

.22"

2.84" 2.84"

.25" DRILL

(4) HOLES

4.41"

2.19"

8.81"

2.19"

4.41"

Panel drilling for Semi-Flush Mounting (front view)



Power Leader Modbus Monitor

• Convenient, in-equipment viewing of data from local and remote power management devices — breakers, relays, meters, controllers

• Critical alarms and events can be quickly and easily viewed at one location

• Easy-to-use, menu-driven interface

• Customizable data display adapts to specific needs

• Compatible with GE’s Power Management Control System software (Version 5.1 or greater)

• Upgradeable firmware

• Free configuration and download tool included


• Remote viewing of device data

• Supports up to 31 Modbus devices and 215 commnet power management devices

• View up to 50 events

• High-speed communications via RS-485 network

• Customizable data display

• Flash-ROM upgradeable to support future enhancements and new devices

• Compatible with GE’s Power Management Control System for remote viewing of PMCS event log

• Universal power supply accepts 100-240Vac, 125-

250Vdc

• Password protection prevents unauthorized configuration changes


• Single- and dual-port RS-485 Modbus versions available

Large, high-temperature, high visibility display provides wide (160°) viewing angle

Keypad controls menudriven user interface

RS-232 port simplifies configuration and firmware download with

Windows-based software

Standards

• UL Listed • CSA Certified

In addition, the Modbus Monitor supports any third-party device with register-based Modbus RTU communications over RS-485 networks.

The Modbus Monitor is not certified to be compatible with any

Modbus master other than GE’s PMCS version 5.1 or greater.

RS-485 Modbus LAN

Modbus Concentrator

H

MULTILIN SR750 commnet segments

POWER LEADER EPM

Enhanced MicroVersaTrip trip unit

Spectra MicroVersaTrip trip unit

Any Modbus RTU compatible device

EPM 3720

H18

H19



Power Leader Modbus Concentrator

Product Overview

GE’s recent introduction of the POWER LEADER Modbus

Concentrator brings performance and compatibility to users of

GE’s Power Leader communication network (commnet) family of power management devices. Used in conjunction with GE's

Power Management Control System (PMCS) software, the

Modbus Concentrator allows you to integrate your existing base of commnet devices into the faster Modbus Remote Terminal Unit

(RTU) based PMCS network, improving overall system performance while retaining the full functionality of each commnet device.

Modbus RTU is an industry-standard communications protocol that operates on an RS485 network. The Modbus RTU protocol is widely supported for supervisory control and data acquisition

(SCADA) systems, building management systems (BMS) and distributed control systems, (DCS). Industry leaders such as Multilin,

Power Measurements Limited and GE Fanuc produce Modbus

RTU-compatible devices and programmable logic controllers.

Modbus open architecture provides a high level of flexibility while reducing the risks associated with proprietary communications protocols. Key benefits of the modbus RTU protocol include:

• Devices and systems can be upgraded easily.

• A wide range of compatible devices from a variety of manufacturers is supported.

• Communications are extremely flexible, both upstream (to

DCS, SCADA and BMS systems) and downstream (to meters and trip units).


• One-piece steel case construction

– Simple installation (no cut-outs)

• Ease of operation

– Four-character alphanumeric high-contrast LED display

– Simple four-button keypad

– All setup done via faceplate keypad and display; no confusing DIP switches

– Quick automatic setup capability

– Remote setup capability allows automated configuration from host PC

• Communications

– Communicates on POWER LEADER commnet communications protocol

– Communicates on Modbus RTU communications protocol

– Each Modbus Concentrator supports up to 32 commnet devices (maximum 215 Commnet devices per RS485 network possible with multiple Concentrators)



Power Leader PQM

Description

The PQM is an ideal choice when continuous monitoring of a three phase system is required. It provides metering for current, voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, cost of power, power factor and frequency. Programmable setpoints and 4 assignable output relays allow control functions to be added for specific applications. This includes basic alarm on over/under current or voltage, unbalance, demand based load shedding and capacitor power factor correction control. More complex control is possible using the 4 switch inputs which also can be used for status such as breaker open/closed,flow information etc.

The PQM may be used as a data gathering device for a plant automation system that integrates process, instrument and electrical requirements. All monitored values are available via two digital RS485 communication ports running the Modbus protocol. If analog values are required for direct interface to a PLC, any of the monitored values can be output to one of 4 isolated analog outputs. A process variable can be measured using an analog input. A front panel RS232 communication port can be connected to a PC for simultaneous access of information by other plant personnel.

The quality of the power system is important with increasing use of electronic loads such as computers, ballasts or variable frequency drives. With the PQM’s power analysis, any phase current or voltage can be displayed and the harmonic content calculated. By knowing the harmonic distribution, action can be taken to prevent overheated transformers, motors, capacitors, neutral wires and nuisance breaker trips. Redistribution of system loading can also be determined. Waveform and chart recorder printouts available from the PQM assist in problem diagnosis.

Applications

• Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks and motors

• Medium and low voltage systems

• Commercial, industrial, utility

• Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc.

• Power quality analysis

Metering/Control

• AVW var VA varh Wh PF Hz unbalance

• AW can VA demand

• Load shedding

• Power factor control

• Pulse input totalizing

• Pulse output based on kWh, kvarh or kVah

Monitoring

• Harmonic analysis through 63rd with THD and TIF

• Event recorder

• Waveform capture

• Data logger

• Triggered trace memory

Communication

• Ports: RS232 front, dual RS485 rear

• Modbus RTU protocol

• Mini RTU: digital 4 in / 4 out

• Analog 1 in / 4 out

• Local/remote display of all values

GEPQMT20CA See GE Multilin Products Catalog and www.ge.com/edc/pmsys

H

H20

H21



Three-Phase Voltage Monitors

Model SPVR

General

UL Listed file No. E103039

The model SPVR is a three-phase voltage monitor which uses negative phase sequence monitoring to protect against phase loss and phase unbalance in a three phase system. It is recommended for main breaker applications since the output relay only changes state when the unbalance is detected. Note that when the optional over/under voltage functions are included, the output relay is energized when conditions are correct and de-energizes on fault, similar to the model LPVR.


• Phase unbalance: 12% (6% recommended for motor load protection)

• Phase loss protection

• Adjustable Trip Delay: 1 to 10 seconds after failure occurs

• Automatic Reset to Normal: upon removal of fault conditions

• Output Relay: nomally de-energized, form C contacts

• Electro-mechanical fault indicator: manually reset

• Status Indicator: bi-colored LED

Green: Output relay de-energized (normal state)

Red: Output relay energized (fault condition)

Dark: Loss of power


• Phase Reversal Protection: operates output relay instantaneously, has LED indicator

• Phase Sequence Protection: (same as phase reversal)

• Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection: output relay de-energizes after preset time delay, if system voltage is over 115% or under 80%. (reset values are 107% and

90% respectively)

• Phase Unbalance: 6% (recommended for motor loads)

SPVR — XXX — XXXXX

Input Voltage:

120/208/240/480 or

600 Vac, (60 Hz)

380 or 415 Vac, (50 Hz)

Optional Features:

M – Manual Reset with local

M – Push Button

O – Over and Under Voltage protection

R – Phase Reversal/Sequence

R – protection

U – Phase Unbalance 6%

➀

Bi-Colored LED Indicator

•Power system condition Normal (Green), Trip (Red)

➁

Electromechanical Diagnostic Indicator

• Phase loss

➂

Adjustable System Delay

• Phase loss

• Phase unbalance

(2) 0.24 Dia. Holes

Clearance holes for

#12 screws

Panel Mounting Layout

Available Models

Model No.

SPVR 120

SPVR 240

SPVR 480

SPVR 575

SPVR 380

SPVR 415

Nominal Vac

120

240

480

575

380

415

Vac Range

96–138

192–276

384–552

460–661

304–437

332–477

Freq.

60

60

60

60

50

50

Output Contact Ratings

Voltage

120 Vac

240 Vac

380 Vac

600 Vac

Continuous

10 A

10 A

3 A

3 A

Make

3160 VA

4800 VA

4800 VA

4800 VA

10 A, 28 Vdc/120 Vac/240 Vac, 80% pf

3 A, 480 Vac/600 Vac, 80% pf

Break

316 VA

480 VA

480 VA

480 VA



Three-Phase Voltage Monitors

Model LPVR

General

U.L. Listed file No. E103039

The model LPVR is a three-phase voltage monitor which uses negative phase sequence monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal, and undervoltage on the power system. Electromechanical diagnostic indicators (manually reset) show trip condition due to phase unbalance, phase loss, and undervoltage. A green led indicates that the power system has no faults present and that the phases are in sequence.

• Provides pre-start and running protection.

• Fully rated 600 volt contacts.

• Diagnostic indicators continue to show cause of operation after voltage removed.

• Adjustable under voltage trip point settable to 75% of nominal.

• Adjustable trip delay from 50 milliseconds to 10 seconds.

• Adjustable reset delay from 1 second to 5 minutes.

• Operates at 6% phase unbalance.

• Operates with a 12.5% phase voltage loss.

• Automatic or manual reset, local or remote.

• Operational green LED indicator.

• Failsafe–will not operate if fault is present.

• Isolated Form “C” output contacts.

• Terminal screws are #6-32 nickel-plated brass.

Available with the following 3 Phase Voltages

P/N

LPVR 120

LPVR 240

LPVR 480

LPVR 575

Nominal Rating

120

240

480

575

Voltage Range

90-125

180-250

360-500

430-600

Model APVR

General

103039

The model APVR phase sensing relay performs the same functions as the model LPVR, except that the relay requires no adjustments. It will fit in the push-button bracket, and thus does not increase the required unit spacing.

Available with the following 3 Phase Voltages

P/N

APVR 120

APVR 240

APVR 480

APVR 575

APVR 380

Nominal

120

240

480

575

380

Voltage Range

95-135

190-270

380-530

455-600

300-425

Frequency

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

➀ Green LED Indicator

• Power system condition.

➁

Electromechanical Diagnostic Indicator

• Phase unbalance.

• Phase loss.

• Undervoltage.

➂

Adjustable System Delay

• Undervoltage trip point.

• .05 - 10 second trip delay.

• 0 - 5 minute reset delay.

➃

Terminal Block

• Automatic or manual reset.

• Input Voltage – 120 to 575 volts.

• Output Contacts – Form C, 1 NO & 1 NC.

Specifications

• Failsafe–will not operate if a fault is present.

• Manual or Automatic reset.

• Fixed undervoltage trip point: approx. 90% pickup, 80% dropout.

• Operates at 6% phase unbalance

• Operates with 6% phase voltage loss.

• 3 second drop-out delay to avoid nuisance tripping

• Operational green LED indicator.

• Isolated Form “C” output contacts.

• Output contact rating:

250Vac, 5 amps

(general use)

30Vdc, 5 amps (resistive)

Illuminated green indicator

H22

H

H23



High-Resistance Grounding Unit

Where to Use

The function of high-resistance grounding equipment is:

1. To provide a ground for neutral of an ungrounded threephase power system, utilizing the high-resistance method.

Using this equipment allows the system to operate basically as an ungrounded system. The equipment is designed to eliminate the danger of high-transient overvoltages during certain types of ground faults.

Note: The use of high-resistance grounding on 600 volt maximum systems precludes line-to-neutral loading.

2. To provide an immediate warning when the first ground fault occurs through an alarm system.

3. To provide a method for quickly locating and removing the fault before another fault develops on another phase, thereby preventing circuit outages due to double line-toground faults. This is done by using the pulsing ground current feature and portable detector.

240, 480, or 600 Volt Systems

Equipment Range

Taps are provided on the standard DS9181 grounding resistor to adjust for a system charging current maximum of 3.56 amps or less. Since the normal charging current for most 600 volt or less systems is usually below one ampere, our standard equipment is adequate; however, for systems with greater charging currents refer to the Company for a quotation. Data for estimating the system charging current is shown in GEK-83750.

Description of modifications applicable to all panels.

Mod.

UV

TR

CT

AM

Item

Undervoltage Relay

Timing Relay

Current Transformer

Ammeter

Function

Drops out on low voltage and provides auxiliary contacts for motor relay failure remote alarm.

Prevents nuisance tripping on temporary transient faults.

Detects ground current

Indicates ground current

Specifications

Equipment Included in Standard 240, 480 or 600 volt Wye and

Delta Systems

1–Line disconnect switch, three phase, interlocked with the door

3–Line fuses, 600 volts, 10 amp, interrupt 200,000 amps

RMS symmetrical

3–Neutral deriving transformers, dry-type (delta system only)

1–Control power transformer (CPT)

1–Meter relay (double set point)

1–Pulsing contactor, set to produce approximately 40 current pulsations per minute

1–Neutral-grounding resistor

1–Relay for pulsing contactor

1–Control relay, with interlocks for remote alarm

1–“Ground Fault” red indicating light

1–“Normal” green indicating light

1–“Normal-Pulse” selector switch

1–TEST resistor

1–TEST push button (momentary type)

1–Instruction plate on door

1–Enclosure

1–Portable ground-current detector with carrying case

(Optional–must be ordered as a separate item)

X–Control circuit operates from 120 volts supplied by secondary of CPT.

X–All connections to control and annunciator circuits wired to terminal boards

X–Cable entry from top or bottom

X–Optional Modifications (See table below)

Approximate Dimensions and Weights

Equipment

Enclosure

Type

NEMA 1

W x D x H

(in inches)

20 x 20 x 90

Wye

600

With Pulsor in Pounds

Delta

700

Without Pulsor in Pounds

Wye

575

Delta

675



High-Resistance Grounding Unit

Standard Equipment Operation

The circuits used for low-voltage systems are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.

During normal conditions, with no ground fault on the system, only a small magnetizing current (capacitance-charging current) flows in the grounding transformers and no voltage appears across the resistor.

When a ground fault occurs, the resistor limits the ground current to a low value.

Taps are provided on the resistor to adjust the magnitude of the ground current in the range of 0.9 to 3.6 amperes, depending on the size of the system, so that the current supplied by the resistor to a ground fault will be slightly greater than the system’s natural capacitance-charging current.

The voltage appearing across the resistor will be sensed by the meter relay. Auxiliary contacts in the control, operated by the meter relay, are available for remote indication and annunciation of a ground.

A green indicating light on the equipment indicates that control voltage is available and that the system is normal. When a fault develops, a red indicating light on the equipment will light and remain lighted until the ground fault is removed. If no remote annunciator is available to notify the operator, an audible alarm may be added to the equipment as an option. A rotating red signal beacon can be used in noisy or remote installations.

To trace the ground fault, the operator turns the selector switch to the “pulse” position. This initiates cycle timing, alternately energizing and de-energizing a shorting contactor at the secondary resistor, resulting in a rhythmic fluctuation in the magnitude of the ground current.

The portable hook-on detector is then used to trace the fluctuations in ground current through the system to the point of fault.

After the ground point has been located and removed from the system, the operator then resets the selector switch to de-energize the pulse-cycle timing circuits.

The ground transformer for delta systems will consist of three single-phase transformers connected wye-delta. For wye systems, where system neutral is available, these grounding transformers are not needed.

H

Fig. 1 600 volts maximum wye systems

Fig. 2 600 volts maximum delta systems

H24

J1


Motor Control Centers Application Data

Approximate Motor Full-Load Current Ratings

Full-Load Current for EPAC Compliant Motors

Average Expected Values

For three-phase, 60 Hertz, GE Type KE (NEMA Design B) dripproof, normal starting torque, continuous 40°C ambient (1.15 service factor) horizontal induction motors.

Motor

HP

1

⁄

4

➀

1

⁄

2

➀

1

⁄

2

3

⁄

4

1

1

1

⁄

2

2

3

5

7

1

⁄

2

10

15

20

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

Synchronous

Speed, RPM

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

4.2

5.4

5.4

5.7

2.6

3.7

3.3

3.4

2.1

2.5

2.4

2.5

1.5

1.9

1.8

2.1

0.80

1.4

0.96

1.1

1.3

1.5

1.3

1.4

575V

0.56

0.60

0.68

0.60

0.68

0.70

0.80

11.4

11.5

14.8

16.2

15.7

16.6

21.7

20.6

19.7

22.2

6.7

6.9

7.5

8.2

9.0

9.9

9.5

10.9

➀ Open, Type K, general purpose, NEMA SF, solid base, rolled-steel-shell, GE induction motors.

7.6

10.6

9.4

9.9

12.0

15.4

15.4

14.4

6.0

7.1

6.9

7.1

4.4

5.5

5.3

6.0

3.7

4.4

3.7

4.1

2.3

3.2

2.8

3.2

200V

1.6

1.7

2.0

1.7

2.0

2.0

2.3

32.7

33.1

42.6

40.3

45.1

47.6

62.3

53.2

56.6

63.9

19.3

19.8

21.4

23.7

26.0

28.5

27.4

27.0

24.0

23.8

25.8

28.8

36.0

35.0

33.0

41.4

12.2

12.6

14.0

17.2

18.0

18.0

19.8

24.0

45.4

46.2

50.0

55.6

6.0

5.8

6.2

9.2

8.0

7.9

8.6

13.4

4.8

4.4

4.6

6.2

3.2

2.2

4.6

4.8

Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents

230V

1.4

460V

0.70

1.5

1.7

1.5

1.7

0.75

0.85

0.75

0.85

2.4

2.8

3.2

3.8

1.8

2.0

2.0

2.8

0.88

1.0

1.0

1.4

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.9

4.0

3.9

4.3

6.7

3.0

2.9

3.1

4.6

2.4

2.2

2.3

3.1

1.6

1.6

2.3

2.4

12.0

11.9

12.9

14.4

18.0

17.6

19.1

20.7

6.1

6.3

7.0

8.6

9.0

9.3

9.9

12.4

22.7

23.1

25.0

27.8

Motor

HP

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

Synchronous

Speed, RPM

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

1200

3600

1800

3600

1800

3600

1200

900

3600

1800

1200

900

3600

1800

Note: The listed data is based on approximate full-load current ratings of standard, open, 1.15 service factor, continuous rated General Electric motors.

Full-load current ratings of similar motors of other manufacturers may vary considerably. Therefore, whenever possible use actual full-load current rating given on motor nameplate. Contact motor manufacturer for full-load currents of single-phase and DC motors.

221

262

281

283

296

338

340

352

159

163

172

172

176

206

207

206

92.2

101

112

114

122

140

142

144

200V

72.0

71.3

73.8

82.6

85.6

81.7

88.6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

370

398

412

419

435

–

–

–

468

482

574

590

594

676

686

774

792

890

296

306

322

346

348

364

378

446

180.0

179.2

191.8

238

232

246

258

290

122

125.2

138.2

145.6

147.4

149.2

153.4

181

Average Expected Values of Full-load Currents

230V

56.0

460V

28.0

60.0

63.2

71.8

67.8

30.0

31.6

35.9

33.9

71.2

73.8

80.2

89.0

97.8

99.6

105.8

129

35.6

36.9

40.1

44.6

48.9

48.5

52.9

64.5

91.6

86.7

95.9

119

116

118

129

139

61.1

61.0

69.1

72.8

73.7

69.8

76.7

90.5

226

239

287

295

297

338

340

387

396

445

143

149

161

164

169

177

189

217

76.7

91.2

97.7

98.4

103

116

118

122

55.3

56.6

59.9

59.7

61.4

71.5

72.0

71.7

32.1

39.2

40.3

39.8

42.3

48.9

49.4

50.1

575V

25.0

24.8

25.7

28.7

29.8

29.9

30.8

230

236

238

270

274

310

317

356

129

138

143

146

151

178

187

193



Mag-Break Magnetic Circuit Breaker Trip Set Positions

The greatest degree of protection is provided when the magnetic trip setting is just above the motor starting inrush current. It is therefore recommended that the magnetic trip position be adjusted to a setting one position higher than the setting that carries the motor starting current. For recommended continuouscurrent ratings, see overload heater tables on pages J-7 through

J-15.

Cat No.

3 Pole

TEC36003

TEC36007

TEC36015

TEC36030

TEC36050

TEC36100

TEC36150

TFC36225

TFC36225A

TJC36400B

TJC36400E

TJC36400F

TJC36400G

TJC36600G

TJC36600H

Continuous

Amperes

3

7

15

30

50

100

150

225

225

400

400

400

400

600

600

Lo

8

18

42

2

13

30

68

Trip Setting Positions

4

18

42

94

6

23

8

28

10

33

Hi

38

54 66 78 90

120 146 172 198

90 140

180 260

190

340

240 290 340 390

420 500 580 660

300 468 636 804 972 1140 1300

600 950 1300 1650 2000 2350 2700

600 780 1020 1200 1400

1000 1200 1630 1920

1200 1400 1850 3250

330 435

550 720

600

945

860

1280

1000 1280 1780 2360

1000 1280 1780 2360

1800 2100 2600 3600

2250

4000

1100

1670

3300

3300

6000

Spectra RMS Circuit Breaker Current Ratings

Max.

Rating Instantaneous Trip Setting, Nominal RMS Sym. Amperes

Frame Frame Plug Trip Setting Adjustment Position

SE

Amps Amps

7

3

7

30

60

100

150

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

125

150

Min.

11

22

43

58

73

87

148

206

267

328

450

Min.

2

13

27

55

74

93

112

118 150

187

178 224

261

236 299

338

297 376

415

374 474

570

2

3

16

35

69

93

117

142

188

236

284

329

377

426

475

524

598

720

3

4

19

43

86

116

147

179

237

296

355

411

472

532

593

654

745

5

24

56

111

151

193

237

308

386

464

534

614

694

775

6

31

71

143

196

253

314

394

498

604

684

787

892

998

Max.

39

90

182

254

332

415

501

637

777

863

999

1,138

1,280

857 1,105 1,426

979 1,265 1,640

897 1,181 1,528 1,991

4 5 Max.

70

90

100

110

205

265

295

325

260

335

375

410

330

425

470

520

410

530

590

650

535

690

765

845

700

900

1,000

1,100

SF 250 125

150

175

200

225

250

125

150

370

440

515

590

665

740

380

455

465

560

655

750

840

935

480

575

570

705

825

940

740 960 1,250

885 1,150 1,500

1,035 1,345 1,750

1,180 1,535 2,000

1,050 1,330 1,730 2,250

1,180 1,480 1,920 2,500

620

740

765

920

990

1,185

1,275

1,530

SG

SK

400

600

800

1,200

300

350

400

450

500

600

300

400

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

250

530

605

680

755

905

1,060

1,210

765

915

670

765

860

955

1,145

1,340

1,530

965

865

990

1,115

1,235

1,480

1,730

1,980

1,215

1,070

1,225

1,375

1,530

1,835

2,140

2,445

1,500

1,385

1,580

1,780

1,975

2,370

2,765

3,160

1,960

1,785

2,040

2,295

2,550

3,060

3,570

4,080

2,530

1,155 1,455 1,800 2,355 3,035

1,070 1,350 1,700 2,100 2,745 3,545

1,200 1,540 1,940 2,400 3,135 4,050

1,375 1,735 2,185 2,695 3,530 4,555

1,525 1,925 2,425 2,995 3,920 5,060

1,830 2,310 2,910 3,595 4,705 6,075

940 1,150 1,445 1,795 2,375 3,015

1,255 1,535 1,930 2,395 3,165 4,015

500

600

700

800

1,570 1,915 2,410 2,990 3,955 5,020

1,875 2,290 2,895 3,610 4,740 6,195

2,155 2,665 3,375 4,240 5,525 7,420

2,440 3,035 3,860 4,875 6,305 8,705

600

700

1,825 2,310 2,905 3,685 4,730 6,110

2,125 2,695 3,390 4,300 5,515 7,125

800 2,430 3,080 3,870 4,910 6,305 8,145

1,000 3,040 3,850 4,840 6,140 8,880 10,180

1,200 3,650 4,620 5,805 7,370 9,455 12,215

J2

J

J3



Thermal Magnetic Trip Ratings for Motor Circuits

These selections are based on 1999 National Electric Code requirements for squirrel-cage motors without code letters or with code letter through G. Lower trip ratings may be required for motor with code letter A and higher trips for motors with code letters H to V. Local code or specific application requirements may necessitate special selection. Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker combination motor control units are not recommended for motors with full-load currents of 3.8 amperes or less.

NEMA Motor

Size HP

2

1

3

5

7.5

10

2

3

15

20

25

30

10

15

20

25

4

50

60

75

100

40

50

30

40

CB

Type

SE

SE

200/208V 230V

Trip Trip

15 15

20

30

50

15

30

30

50 50

70

SE

SF

SGL

70

100

100

125

200

100

100

125

150

200

380V

Trip

15

15

20

30

30

50

70

70

100

100

125

150

200

460V

Trip

15

15

15

20

20

40

50

60

70

100

100

125

200

200

575V

Trip

15

15

15

20

20

30

40

50

50

70

100

100

125

150

NEMA Motor

Size HP

50

5

60

75

100

125

6

150

200

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

CB

Type

SGL

SGL/SKL

SKL

200/208V 230V

Trip

200/250

Trip

300

350

225/250

300/350

400

380V

Trip

225/250

300

300/350

460V

Trip

575V

Trip

225/250 225/250

300 250

350/400 300

500

800

800

800

800

1000 500

800

800

500

600

800

1000

400

500

800

800

Motor Selection Table for Spectra Motor Circuit Protectors

2.0

3.0

5.0

–

7.5

Max HP per System Voltage

208V 230V 380V 460V

0.5

1.0

0.5

1.5

1.0

3.0

1.0

3.0

3.0

5.0

5.0

10.0

5.0

10.0

7.5

10

25

40

40

50

60

75

100

150

10

15

25

30

50

50

50

60

75

100

150

200

15

25

30

50

75

60

75

100

125

150

200

300

15

25

25

30

50

100

60

100

125

150

200

250

350

400

30

40

50

15

20

25

60

100

75

100

150

575V

1.5

3.0

7.5

10.0

200

250

300

400

Starter

Size

1

2

3

4RVAT➀

4STD

5

6

150

100

150

150

200

250

300

350

400

400

500

800

1000

60

50

70

100

25

30

40

50

Rating Plug

Amps

3

CAT#

SRPE7A3

7

15

SRPE7A7

SRPE30A15

20

25

30

40

SRPE30A20

SRPE30A25

SRPE30A30

SRPE60A40

SRPE30A25

SRPE30A30

SRPE60A40

SRPE60A50

SRPE60A60

SRPE60A50

SRPE100A70

SRPE100A100

SRPE150A150

SRPE150A100

SRPE150A150

SRPF250A150

SRPF250A200

SRPG400A250

SRPG400A300

SRPG400A350

SRPG400A400

SRPG800A400

SRPG800A500

SRPK1200A800

SRPK1200A1000

➀ Size 4 RVAT with SF CB requires an additional 6” height extension.

CB

Sensor

7

400

600

1200

100

150

150

200

30

60

30

60

CB

Frame

SE

150

SF

250

SG

600

SG

600

SK

1200



Overload Heater Tables

Heaters for Ther-Mag Controllers

For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.15 to

1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full load current multiplied by 1.25.

WARNING: Overload relays with automatic reset may automatically start a motor connected to a 2-wire control circuit.

When automatic restarting is not desired, use a 3-wire control circuit.

Provide short circuit protection in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.

Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.41-.45

.46-.49

.50-.53

.54-.59

.60-.65

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

Heater

Number

CR 123

C054A

C060A

C066A

C071A

C078A

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

4.96-549

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

17.2-18.0

Size 1

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.3

26.4-27.0

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

Heater

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

Size 2 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

5.48-5.85

5.85-6.47

6.48-7.35

7.36-8.06

8.07-9.03

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

Heater

Number

CR 123

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-45.0

Heater

Number

CR 123

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

WARNING: Opening of the circuit breaker may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all currentcarrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

19.0-19.3

19.4-22.1

22.2-23.4

23.5-27.0

27.1-29.1

29.2-31.8

31.9-33.9

34.0-37.6

37.7-41.9

42.0-47.7

47.8-52.1

52.2-55.8

55.9-59.7

59.8-68.1

68.2-71.5

71.6-78.2

78.3-87.5

87.6-90.0

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.1

26.2-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-90.0


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

27.1-32.2

32.3-34.0

34.1-36.8

36.9-44.6

44.7-48.4

48.5-53.9

54.0-57.4

57.5-60.0

60.1-69.5

69.6-71.7

71.8-79.9

80.0-92.3

92.4-97.0

97.1-108

109-118

119-131

132-135

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-131

132-135


Motor FullHeater Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

109-118

119-128

129-138

139-155

156-168

169-184

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

185-200

201-221

222-237

238-262

263-270

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

F174C

J4

J



J5


Heaters for Mag-Break Controllers

The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.

WARNING:

To maintain overload, short circuit, and ground fault protection, use the following instructions to select heaters and to adjust the Mag-Break trip setting.


1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Use the heater table to verify that the Mag-Break and current limiter rating is correct for the motor full-load current. Then set the Mag-Break trip setting to the recommended value.

If the Mag-Break trips when starting the motor, increase trip setting one step at a time until the motor can be consistently started.

Size 0 and 1 (Standard )

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C630A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

Heater

Number

CR 123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

2.25-2.43

2.44-2.75

2.76-3.25

3.26-3.43

3.44-4.03

4.04-4.43

4.44-4.94

4.95-5.36

5.37-5.77

5.37-5.77

5.78-6.35

6.36-6.92

6.93-7.99

8.00-8.47

8.48-9.19

9.20-10.0

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.65-.74

.75-.84

.85-.92

.93-1.02

1.03-1.10

1.11-1.23

1.24-1.38

1.39-1.49

1.50-1.67

1.68-1.79

1.80-1.98

1.99-2.24

2.25-2.43

10.1-10.7

10.8-12.0

10.8-12.0

12.1-12.9

12.1-12.9

13.0-15.1

15.2-16.3

16.4-17.9

Size 1

18.0-19.7

19.8-21.2

21.3-22.3

22.4-23.5

23.6-25.5

23.6-25.5

25.6-27.0

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

15

15

15

15

7

15

15

15

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

30

30

30

30

15

15

30

15

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

TEC &

TECL

Rating

3

3

3

3

3

30

30

30

30

30

50

50

2

3

LO

LO

1

1

2

3

3

8

8

5

6

7

LO

1

1

1

3

LO

LO

LO

2

2

1

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

1

2

2

LO

3

2

3

1

1

LO

LO

LO

1

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

1

1

2

7

8

5

6

4

4

2

3

4

4

2

3

2

8

6

7

5

6

3

4

2

3

6

2

6

7

4

5

3

4

1

2

Do not exceed the maximum trip setting shown in the heater table.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of heater full-load current multiplied by 1.25.



WARNING: Tripping of the Mag-Break may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and be replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

Size 1

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.0

24.0-26.0

26.1-27.0

Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C592A

C630A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

Heater

Number

CR 123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

15

15

15

15

15

7

15

15

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

15

15

15

30

30

30

30

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

TEC &

TECL

Rating

3

3

3

3

3

30

50

30

50

50

30

30

30

30

2

LO

3

LO

LO

2

2

1

1

8

3

8

2

4

6

7

5

5

LO

LO

1

1

LO

3

LO

LO

2

2

1

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

1

2

2

LO

LO

LO

LO

2

3

1

2

LO

LO

LO

1

LO

LO

LO

LO

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

LO

LO

1

1

2

7

8

5

6

4

4

2

3

2

3

4

7

2

6

7

4

5

3

3

2

2

1

8

6

7

5

5

3

4

1

2





Size 2 (Standard )

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

8.81-9.27

9.28-9.99

10.0-11.1

11.2-12.1

11.2-12.1

12.2-13.0

12.2-13.0

13.1-15.5

15.6-16.8

16.9-18.0

18.1-19.7

19.8-21.6

21.7-23.9

21.7-23.9

24.0-25.5

24.0-25.5

25.6-26.0

25.6-28.2

28.3-31.6

31.7-34.7

34.8-37.8

37.9-40.6

40.7-43.4

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

30

50

30

30

30

30

30

TEC &

TECL

Rating

15

15

15

15

30

15

30

50

50

50

50

50

30

50

50

2

2

3

3

LO

3

LO

1

2

3

LO

3

1

1

2

2

3

LO

4

LO

Rec.

2

2

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

6

6

7

2

8

2

6

7

2

8

3

4

5

5

5

6

7

8

3

9

3

4

Size 2 (Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.0

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.0

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-43.4

Heater

Number

CR 123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C137B

C151B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C250B

C273B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

30

50

30

30

30

30

30

TEC &

TECL

Rating

15

15

15

15

30

15

30

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

2

3

3

LO

LO

1

2

2

3

LO

4

1

1

2

2

3

LO

4

LO

Rec.

2

2

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

6

7

8

2

9

3

7

8

2

9

3

5

5

6

7

9

9

4

4

4

6


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.0

26.1-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-43.4

43.5-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

Heater

Number

CR 123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

50

50

100

100

50

50

50

50

100

100

TEC &

TECL

Rating

30

30

30

30

1

2

LO

LO

LO

LO

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

Rec.

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

6

7

7

6

8

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

6

Application Data

Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) cont.

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-86.9

Heater

Number

CR 123

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

TEC &

TECL

Rating

100

100

100

100

100

2

2

1

2

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Rec.

Max.

6

7

5

6

9

Size 4 (Standard)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.4

43.5-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

70.7-76.3

76.4-86.9

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102

103-110

111-122

123-131

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F914B

F104C

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.4

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-86.9

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-130

Heater

Number

CR 123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

TEC &

TECL

Rating

50

50

50

50

100

150

150

150

150

150

150

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

TEC &

TECL

Rating

50

50

50

50

150

100

150

150

150

150

150

150

1

1

1

2

LO

4

LO

1

2

2

3

3

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

Rec.

1

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

5

6

7

5

5

6

7

3

3

3

4

3

4

4

5

1

8

2

3

1

2

2

4

LO

1

1

2

2

3

3

LO

2

1

1

2

2

3

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

5

6

7

5

5

6

7

2

3

3

4

4

5

6

8

2

3

3


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

106-115

116-125

126-135

126-135

136-151

152-164

165-179

180-195

196-215

216-231

232-255

256-270

Heater

Number

CR 123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

TEC &

TECL

Rating

550-1670

550-1670

550-1670

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

1000-3300

3

4

4

LO

1

2

2

3

3

LO

LO

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

6

7

7

3

3

6

7

HI

4

5

5

6

J6

J

J7





Size 0 and 1 (Standard)

2.44-2.75

2.76-3.25

3.26-3.43

3.44-4.03

4.04-4.43

4.44-4.94

4.95-5.36

5.37-5.77

5.37-5.77

5.78-6.35

6.36-6.92

6.93-7.99

8.00-8.47

8.48-9.19

9.20-10.0

10.1-10.7

10.8-12.0

12.1-12.9

13.0-15.1

15.2-16.3

16.4-17.9

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.65-.74

.75-.84

.85-.92

.93-1.02

1.03-1.10

1.11-1.23

1.24-1.38

1.39-1.49

1.50-1.67

1.68-1.79

1.80-1.98

1.99-2.24

2.25-2.43

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C630A

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

Heater

Number

CR123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

15

15

20

20

15

15

15

15

20

20

20

25

25

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

SE

Rating

Plug

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

3

LO

LO

LO

2

4

3

2

3

3

3

4

2

3

LO

LO

LO

2

LO

2

3

3

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

LO

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

LO

LO

LO

2

2

5

6

5

5

4

4

2

3

4

5

5

5

4

4

3

3

6

5

5

5

6

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

4


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

18.0-19.7

19.8-21.2

21.3-22.3

22.4-23.5

23.6-25.5

25.6-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

SE

Rating

Plug

30

30

30

40

40

40

2

3

3

3

3

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

6

5


Size 0 and 1 (Ambient Comp.)

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C630A

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C148A

C163A

C184A

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

Heater

Number

CR123

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

15

15

20

20

15

15

15

15

20

20

20

25

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

SE

Rating

Plug

3

3

3

3

3


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.0

26.1-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

SE

Rating

Plug

25

30

30

30

40

40

40

3

2

3

3

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

6

3

3

5

5

6

5

5

5

2

2

2

3

LO

LO

2

2

4

3

2

3

3

4

2

3

LO

LO

2

2

3

3

2

2

LO

LO

LO

2

LO

LO

LO

LO

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

LO

LO

LO

2

2

5

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

4

4

5

5

4

4

3

3

6

5

5

5

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

4






Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

8.81-9.27

9.28-9.99

10.0-11.1

11.2-12.1

12.2-13.0

13.1-15.5

15.6-16.8

16.9-18.0

18.1-19.7

19.8-21.6

21.7-23.9

24.0-25.5

25.6-28.2

28.3-31.6

31.7-34.7

34.8-37.8

37.9-40.6

40.7-43.4

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

Heater

Number

CR123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

40

40

50

20

25

25

30

SE

Rating

Plug

15

20

20

20

20

50

50

50

60

60

2

2

3

2

3

3

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

4

5

6

5

5

6

6

5

5

5

5

6

5

6

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-43.4

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

Heater

Number

CR123

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

30

40

40

50

20

25

25

30

SE

Rating

Plug

15

20

20

20

20

50

50

50

60

60

2

2

3

2

3

3

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

4

5

6

5

5

6

6

5

5

6

5

6

5

6

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.0

26.1-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F207B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

50

50

50

70

70

100

SE

Rating

Plug

30

30

30

40

40

3

2

3

3

3

LO

3

3

3

3

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4


Size 3 (Standard and Ambient Comp.) cont.

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-86.9

Heater

Number

CR123

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

SE

Rating

Plug

100

100

100

100

100

150

150

3

3

2

3

Rec.

LO

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

2

2

4

5

5

6

5

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102.0

103.0-110.0

111.0-122.0

123.0-131.0

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

100

100

150

150

150

SE

Rating

Plug

50

50

70

70

70

150

150

150

150

2

3

3

2

2

3

2

2

4

4

3

3

3

3

3

2

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

5

6

6

5

5

5

5

6

4

5

5

4

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105.0

106.0-114.0

115.0-128.0

129.0-130.0

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

100

100

150

150

150

SE

Rating

Plug

50

50

70

70

70

150

150

150

150

2

3

3

2

2

3

2

2

4

4

3

3

3

3

3

2

Rec.

3

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

5

5

5

5

5

6

6

5

5

5

5

6

4

5

5

4

5

J8

J

J9






Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-102.0

103.0-110.0

111.0-122.0

123.0-131.0

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

150

150

150

200

200

SF

Rating

Plug

70

70

70

70

70

200

200

200

200

LO

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

2

3

2

2

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

5

5

4

5

6

6

5

6

4

4

4

4

5

4

4

4


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.8

43.9-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105.0

106.0-114.0

115.0-128.0

129.0-130.0

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

100

100

100

150

150

150

200

200

SF

Rating

Plug

70

70

70

70

70

200

200

200

200

LO

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

LO

LO

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

Rec.

2

Mag-Break

Trip Setting

Max.

4

5

5

4

5

6

6

5

6

4

4

4

4

5

4

4

4


Size 5 – 300:15 CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

106-115

116-125

126-135

136-151

152-164

165-179

180-195

196-215

216-231

232-255

256-270

Heater

Number

CR123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

300

350

350

400

400

400

SG

Rating

Plug

250

250

250

250

300

2

2

2

2

2

3

LO

2

2

2

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

LO

Max.

3

5

4

4

4

5

4

5

4

5

5


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

181-197

198-214

215-238

239-258

259-290

291-346

347-387

388-424

Heater

Number

CR123

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

SG

Rating

Plug

400

400

500

500

500

600

600

600

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

MIN.

Max.

4

2

MIN

MIN

2

4

5

5

4

MIN

2

3

5

5

MAX


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph, 3 Heater

181-197

198-214

215-238

239-258

259-290

291-346

347-387

388-423

424-467

468-516

517-540

Heater

Number

CR123

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

SK

Rating

Plug

400

400

400

500

500

800

800

800

1000

1000

1000

LO

LO

2

LO

2

2

2

3

LO

2

Instantaneous

Trip Setting

Rec.

LO

Max.

4

4

5

4

5

5

4

4

5

4

5




Overload Relays

Electronic Overloads for Circuit Breaker Controllers

Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25 service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.

4

4

4

5 ➀

3

3

2

3

NEMA Size

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

5 ➀

5 ➀

6 ➁

6 ➁

FLA Range in Amps

0.8 to 1.59

1.6 to 3.19

3.2 to 6.49

6.5 to 12.8

13 to 27

13 to 25.6

26 to 49.9

50 to 100

17 to 34.9

35 to 64.9

65 to 90

17 to 34.9

35 to 64.9

65 to 135

32 to 64.0

65 to 129.9

130 to 270

130 to 259.9

260 to 540

Catalog Number

CR324CXD

CR324CXE

CR324CXF

CR324CXG

CR324CXH

CR324DXG

CR324DXH

CR324DXJ

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324GXN

CR324GXP

CR324GXQ

CR324HXS

CR324HXT

Breaker Frame & Type

E Mag. & Thermal Mag.











E,F&G Mag. & Thermal Mag.



G Mag. & Thermal Mag.



G,K Mag. & Thermal Mag.

K Mag. & Thermal Mag

➀

300:15 CT’s

➁

800:5 CT’s

Overload Relays for Compact 6” Starter CL45A310MJ, NEMA Size 1

FLA Range in Amps

0.4-.65

0.65-1.1

1-1.5

1.3-1.9

1.8-2.7

2.5-4.1

4.0-6.3

5.5-8.5

8.0-12

10.0-16

14.5-18

17.5-22

21-26

Class 10

Catalog Number

RTN1D

RTN1F

RTN1G

RTN1H

RTN1J

RTNIK

RTNIL

RTNIM

RTNIN

RTNIP

RTNIS

RTNIT

RTNIU

Class 20

Catalog Number

RT12K

RT12L

RT12M

RT12N

RT12P

RT12S

RT12T

RT12U

Breaker Frame & Type















J

J10




Heaters for Fused Controllers

The Mag-Break protector is factory adjusted to the minimum trip setting.


1.25, select heaters from the heater table. For continuous rated motors with a service factor of 1.0, multiply the motor full-load current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters.

Overload relay tripping current in 40°C ambient is the minimum value of full-load current multiplied by 1.25.


Table 1–Maximum Fuse and Short-Circuit Rating

NEMA

Size

3

4

1

2

5

Max.

Clip

30A

60

100

200

400

Class RK Fuse

Max. RMS

Sym. Amps

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

Max.

Clip

60A

100

200

400

600

Class J Fuse

Max. RMS

Sym. Amps

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

WARNING: Opening of the fuse(s) may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted. To provide continued protection against fire or shock hazard, all current-carrying

Size 0 and 1 (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

1.56-1.73

1.74-1.89

1.90-2.05

2.06-2.28

2.29-2.47

2.48-2.79

2.80-3.31

3.32-3.70

3.71-4.06

4.07-4.47

4.48-4.95

4.96-5.49

5.50-5.91

5.92-6.47

6.48-7.20

7.21-8.22

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

.41-.45

.46-.49

.50-.53

.54-.59

.60-.65

.66-.76

.77-.84

.85-.93

.94-1.04

1.05-1.15

1.16-1.27

1.28-1.39

1.40-1.55

8.23-8.72

8.73-9.67

9.68-10.4

10.5-11.0

11.1-12.4

12.5-13.2

13.3-15.4

15.5-17.1

17.2-18.0

C196A

C220A

C239A

C268A

C301A

C326A

C356A

C379A

C419A

C466A

C526A

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

Heater

Number

CR123

C054A

C060A

C066A

C071A

C078A

C087A

C097A

C109A

C118A

C131A

C148A

C163A

C184A

20

25

25

30

15

15

15

20

6

10

10

12

6

6

6

6

30

35➀

35➀

40➀

45➀

50➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

3

6

3

3

3

3

3

3

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

3

3

3

3

3


Provide short-circuit protection in accordance with the National

Electrical Code, except Fuses are not to exceed the value shown in the table.

Suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than the maximum RMS symmetrical amperes indicated in the table below, 600-volts maximum, when protected by an appropriate fuse having an interrupting rating not less than the available short-circuit current.

Class K-1, K-5 Fuse

Max.

Max. RMS

Clip

Fuse

Sym. Amps

5,000 per

Overload

Heater

Table

5,000

5,000

10,000

10,000

parts and other components of the motor controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If heater burnout occurs, the complete overload relay must be replaced.

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

Size 1

17.2-18.1

18.2-20.0

20.1-21.5

21.6-22.5

22.6-23.9

24.0-26.3

26.4-27.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀

60➀


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

5.48-5.85

5.86-6.47

6.48-7.35

7.36-8.06

8.07-9.03

9.04-9.61

9.62-10.5

10.6-11.6

11.7-12.5

12.6-13.6

13.7-16.7

16.8-17.9

18.0-18.7

18.8-20.4

20.5-22.7

22.8-24.7

24.8-26.3

26.4-29.5

29.6-32.5

32.6-36.7

36.8-41.9

42.0-43.2

43.3-45.0

Heater

Number

CR123

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

C163B

C180B

C198B

C214B

C228B

C250B

C273B

C303B

C330B

C366B

C400B

C440B

C460B

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

20

20

25

30

30

35

35

40

45

50

60

60

70➀

80➀

80➀

90➀

90➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

100➀

➀ See Table 1 for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.

J11




Heaters for Fused Controllers


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

19.0-19.3

19.4-22.1

22.2-23.4

23.5-27.0

27.1-29.1

29.2-31.8

31.9-33.9

34.0-37.6

37.7-41.9

42.0-47.7

47.8-52.1

52.2-55.8

55.9-59.7

59.8-68.1

68.2-71.5

71.6-78.2

78.3-87.5

87.6-90.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

70

80

80

90

100

110➀

125➀

125➀

150➀

175➀

175➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

J12


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

17.8-18.4

18.5-21.1

21.2-22.1

22.2-26.1

26.2-28.0

28.1-31.3

31.4-33.3

33.4-34.3

34.4-40.9

41.0-44.7

44.8-51.0

51.1-52.0

52.1-55.4

55.5-63.3

63.4-66.1

66.2-73.5

73.6-82.2

82.3-90.0

Heater

Number

CR123

F233B

F243B

F270B

F300B

F327B

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

70

80

80

90

100

110➀

125➀

125➀

150➀

150➀

175➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀

200➀


Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

27.1-32.2

32.3-34.0

34.1-36.8

36.9-44.6

44.7-48.4

48.5-53.9

54.0-57.4

57.5-60.0

60.1-69.5

69.6-71.7

71.8-79.9

80.0-92.3

92.4-97.0

97.1-108

109-118

119-131

132-135

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

110

125

125

150

175

175

200

225➀

225➀

250➀

275➀

300➀

350➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

➀ See Table 1 (page J-17) for maximum fuse and short-circuit rating.



Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

28.8-32.0

32.1-34.2

34.3-36.7

36.8-43.9

44.0-46.6

46.7-52.6

52.7-55.6

55.7-58.7

58.8-67.1

67.2-70.6

70.7-76.3

76.4-88.7

88.8-93.4

93.5-105

106-114

115-128

129-131

132-135

Heater

Number

CR123

F357B

F395B

F430B

F487B

F567B

F614B

F658B

F719B

F772B

F848B

F914B

F104C

F114C

F118C

F133C

F149C

F161C

F174C

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

110

125

125

150

175

175

200

225➀

225➀

250➀

275➀

300➀

350➀

350➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

400➀

Size 5 – 300:15CT (Standard and Ambient Comp.)

Motor Full-

Load Amps

3-Ph., 3-Heater

109-118

119-128

129-138

139-155

156-168

169-184

185-200

201-221

222-237

238-262

263-270

Heater

Number

CR123

C592A

C630A

C695A

C778A

C867A

C955A

C104B

C113B

C125B

C137B

C151B

Maximum

Fuse

Rating

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Electronic Overload Table for Fusible Controllers

Tripping current is 120% of Dial setting. Motors with 1.15-1.25

service factor, set dial to motor FLA Motors with 1.0 service factor, set dial to 0.9 motor FLA.

NEMA Size FLA Range in Amps

1 0.8 to 1.59

1

1

1.6 to 3.19

3.2 to 6.49

2

2

1

1

6.5 to 12.8

13 to 27

13 to 25.6

26 to 49.9

4

4

4

5 ➀

5 ➀

3

3

2

3

5 ➀

6 ➁

6 ➁

50 to 100

17 to 34.9

35 to 64.9

65 to 90

17 to 34.9

35 to 64.9

65 to 135

32 to 64.0

65 to 129.9

130 to 270

130 to 259.9

260 to 540

➀ 300:15 CT’s

➁ 800:5 CT’s

Catalog Number Max. Fuse in Amps

CR324CXD Class R 30 Class J 60

CR324CXE

CR324CXF

CR324CXG

CR324CXH

CR324DXG

CR324DXH

60 100

CR324DXJ

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324FXK

CR324FXL

CR324FXM

CR324GXN

CR324GXP

CR324GXQ

CR324HXS

CR324HXT

100

200

400

600

200

400

600

Class L 1200

J

J13



Starter Fuse Selection

The following tables are furnished as a guide. Check vendor fuse characteristics before making final selection.

200 and 208 Volts

Size

1

2

3

4

5

10.6

16.3

25.3

31.3

45.1

591

731

881

Typical

FLA

2.3

3.2

3.9

5.3

7.1

120

150

174

210

BMC–Bussman Fuse

CSC–Chase Shawmut Fuse

1

1

⁄

2

2

3

5

7

1

⁄

2

Hp

1

⁄

2

3

⁄

4

1

30

40

50

60

75

10

15

20

25

100

100

100

200

30

30

30

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

200

400

400

400

60

90

100

125

15

25

30

50

UL Class J

Time Delay No Time DelayBMC

CSC# AJT

3

Clip CSC# A4J

30 10

Clip

30

5

6

8

10

30

30

30

30

10

15

20

25

30

30

30

30

175

225

250

300

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

30

45

60

90

110

150

175

200

225

300

350

450

400

400

400

600

30

60

60

100

200

200

200

200

90

100

150

175

30

40

60

70

200

250

12

20

7

9

FRN

2.8

4

5

60

100

100

100

30

30

30

60

Time-Delay RK-5

CSC

Clip

30

TR

3.5

30

30

30

30

4.5

6.25

8

12

200

200

200

400

175

225

225

300

60

90

100

125

15

25

30

40

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

400

400

400

30

30

30

30

Clip

30

30

30

230 Volts

4

5

Size

1

2

3

6

60

75

100

125

150

200

25

30

40

50

10

15

15

20

1

1

⁄

2

2

3

5

7

1

⁄

2

Hp

1

⁄

2

3

⁄

4

1

14.2

22.0

27.2

39.2

39.2

51.4

63.6

76.6

Typical

FLA

2.0

2.8

3.4

4.6

6.2

9.2

104

130

151

183

240

296

348

468

100

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

100

150

200

225

300

350

450

500

–

60

60

80

100

15

25

30

40

Time Delay

UL Class J

No Time Delay

CSC# AJT Clip CSC# A4J

3 30 10

Clip

30

4

6

8

10

30

30

30

30

15

15

30

25

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

100

100

30

45

60

90

–

110

150

175

30

60

60

100

–

200

200

200

100

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

–

200

225

300

350

400

600

600

–

–

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

17.5

25

35

50

–

60

80

100

BMC

FRN

2.5

3.5

4

6.25

8

12

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

Time-Delay RK-5

60

100

100

200

30

60

60

–

30

30

30

30

Clip

30

30

30

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

80

100

100

150

30

40

60

–

8

10

15

25

TR

3

4

5.6

200

225

300

350

450

500

600

–

100

100

100

30

30

60

60

30

30

30

30

CSC

Clip

30

30

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600




75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

30

40

50

60

10

15

20

25

1

1

⁄

2

2

3

5

7

1

⁄

2

Hp

1

⁄

2

3

⁄

4

1

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

30

40

50

60

10

15

20

25

1

1

⁄

2

2

3

5

7

1

⁄

2

Hp

1

⁄

2

3

⁄

4

1

575 Volts

Starter Fuse Selection

460 Volts

52.0

65.0

75.5

91.5

120

148

172

224

295

343

396

453

4.6

7.1

11.0

13.6

19.6

25.7

31.8

38.3

Typical

FLA

1.0

1.4

1.7

2.3

3.1

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

600

60

60

60

100

30

30

30

30

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

80

100

110

150

175

225

250

300

450

500

600

–

30

40

50

60

8

10

15

20

CSC# AJT

1.5

UL Class J

Time Delay No Time Delay

CLIP CSC# A4J

30 3

CLIP

30

4

5

2

3

30

30

30

30

3

6

6

10

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

15

25

35

40

50

90

100

110

60

100

100

200

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

–

125

150

175

225

225

300

350

500

600

–

–

–

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

–

Size

1

2

3

4

5

6

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

600

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

Switch

Amp

30

30

30

30

30

30

52.0

60.4

73.2

96.0

118

138

179

236

274

317

363

5.7

8.8

10.9

15.7

20.6

25.4

30.6

41.6

Typical

FLA

.8

1.1

1.4

1.8

2.5

3.7

60

80

90

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

600

25

35

40

45

6

10

15

15

UL Class J

Time Delay No Time Delay

CSC# AJT

1.5

CLIP

30

CSC# A4J

3

CLIP

30

3

4

2

2

30

30

30

30

3

6

6

10

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

15

20

30

35

45

60

80

100

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600

110

125

150

175

225

225

300

400

500

600

–

–

200

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

–

–

60

80

90

110

150

200

225

300

350

400

450

500

25

35

40

45

5

9

15

17.5

BMC

Time-Delay K-5

CSC

FRS

1.25

Clip

30

TRS

1.4

1.6

2

2.8

3.5

30

30

30

30

2

2.5

4

5

30

30

30

30

30

60

60

60

30

40

50

60

7

10

15

20

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

75

100

110

150

175

225

250

350

400

500

600

600

60

60

100

100

30

30

30

60

30

30

30

30

Clip

30

30

30

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

600

600

60

70

90

110

150

175

225

300

350

400

450

25

35

40

45

7

10

15

20

BMC

FRS

1.25

1.25

1.6

2.25

2.8

4.5

60

60

100

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

400

600

30

30

60

60

30

30

30

30

Time-Delay K-5

CSC

Clip

30

TRS

1.4

30

30

30

30

1.6

2

3

4

25

35

40

45

6

9

15

15

60

80

90

125

150

175

225

300

350

450

500

600

60

60

60

100

30

30

30

60

30

30

30

30

Clip

30

30

30

100

200

200

200

400

400

400

600

600

600


J

J14

J15



Control Transformer Fusing

CPT

VA

60

100

150

200

250

300

500

750

1000

5

6

6

➀

3

4

Primary Fuse Amps Sec. Fuse Amps

208V 240V 380V 480V 600V 120V 240V

1

2

1

2

1

1.25

0.5

1

0.5

1

0.6

1

0.3

0.5

➀

3

4

5

6

➀

➀

➀

2

2

2

3.5

6

8

➀

1.5

2

2

2

5

7

➀

1.25

1.5

2

2

4

6

8

1.6

2

2.5

3.2

5

7

10

0.8

1

1.25

1.6

2.5

3.5

5

Primary Fuses–Class CC Or Equivalent (GOULD #ATM-R STD)

Secondary Fuses– Class H Or Equivalent (GOULD #TR STD)

➀

Requires class RK-5 time delay or equivalent.

VA

60

100

150

200

250

300

500

Typical CPT Ratings (480V/120V Shown)

%R %X

Open Circuit

Secondary Volts

9.05

6.39

1.03

1.18

131.9

129.4

5.02

5.09

6.81

5.15

5.84

1.01

1.06

.88

.73

1.45

127.3

126.2

127.8

126.4

128.7


Heat Loss Considerations

In determining the heat loss of a motor control center for air conditioning requirements, 250 watts per foot of lineup is a reasonable assumption.

Actual heat loss will vary due to section loading and diversity factors. A typical motor control center may operate normally at

60 percent of maximum possible loading.

Fully rated circuit breaker starters with CPT’s, approximate losses are:

Size 1– 27 Watts

Size 2– 57 Watts

Size 3–130 Watts

Size 4–200 Watts

Size 5–300 Watts

Size 6–650 Watts

Heat losses for feeders and mains vary depending on frame size, loading and type of trip with electronic trips having lower losses. The following table provides a general guide for estimating losses assuming 80 percent loading. For critical applications refer to the Company.

Rating (Amps)

50

100

150

225

400

600

1200

Loss (Watts)

15

20

25

40

50

80

150

Typical losses for transformers:

1kVA, 1-Ph

5 kVA, 1-Ph

9 kVA, 3-Ph

75 Watts

190 Watts

295 Watts

15 kVA, 3-Ph

30 kVA, 3-Ph

460 Watts

1000 Watts

Horizontal and vertical bus losses, when loaded to capacity are approximately 100 watts per section.

Solid State Starters or VFDs will typically generate 3 watts per ampere of load during operation.



Motor Loads

NEMA Contactor Ratings

Description

Single Phase

Three Phase

115V

230V

200V

230V

380/415V

460V

575V

1

2

3

Normal Starting Duty HP/KW rating by NEMA Size

7.5/5.5

7.5/5.5

2

3

7.5

10/7.5

15/11

3

7.5

15

25/18.5

30/22

4

–

–

40/30

50/37

5

–

–

75/55

6

–

–

150/110

100/75 200/150

10/7.5

25/18.5

10/7.5

25/18.5

10/7.5

25/18.5

50/37

50/37

50/37

75/55

100/75

100/75

150/110 300/260

200/150 400/260

200/150 400/260


Non-Motor Loads

When selecting contactors for non-motor loads, the following load characteristics should be considered:

1. Voltage and maximum continuous current.

2. Maximum peak inrush current and duration.

3. RMS current and duration of maximum current on cyclic loads.

4. Frequency of operation.

5. Maximum interrupting current, voltage, power factor and wave form.

6. Available short-circuit current.

Non-motor load ratings are based on the use of two poles to control single-phase loads and three poles to control threephase loads.

Capacitor switching, requires special considerations. A discharged capacitor acts essentially like a short circuit, and the inrush current is limited by the impedance connected in series with the capacitor which includes connecting cables. Therefore, the maximum capacitance which can be switched by a contactor will increase with higher series impedance. Switching more than one capacitor or capacitor bank in close electrical proximity to each other should be avoided as the energized capacitor bank can increase the inrush current to the second bank when it is energized. Reactors or resistors may be required between the two capacitor banks to limit inrush currents.

NEMA Standards require shunt capacitors to operate satisfactorily at 135 percent of rated KVAR due to manufacturing tolerances and other variations. The higher inrush and steady state currents associated with these capacitors should be taken into consideration.

NEMA Publication ICS2-210 covers non-motor loads.

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

NEMA Contactor Ratings

Size of

Contactor

Cont.

Amps

Maximum

Inrush

Current

Tung sten

➀

(Amps Lamps

Peak)

18

27

45

90

135

270

540

140

288

483

947

1581

3163

6326

10

15

30

60

120

240

480

18

27

45

90

135

270

540

Resistive

Loads

➀

Transformer Primary Switching (kVA)

Transformers having inrush currents of not more Transformers having inrush currents of over than 20 times FLA

Single-Phase Volts Three-Phase Volts

20 through 40 times FLA

Single-Phase Volts Three-Phase Volts

120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 208 240 480 600

0.6

1.2

2.4

3 1.8

2.1

4.2

5.2

0.3

0.6

1.2

1.5

0.9

1.0

2.1

2.6

1.2

2.4

2.1

4.1

4.9

8.3

6.2

10

3.6

6.3

4.3

7.2

8.5

14

11

18

0.6

1.0

1.2

2.1

2.5

4.2

3.1

5.2

1.8

3.1

2.1

3.6

4.3

7.2

5.3

8.9

4.1

8.1

6.8

14

14

27

27

16

27

54

20

34

68

12

20

41

54 108 135 81

14

23

47

94

28

47

35

59

94 117 6.8

188 234

2.0

4.1

3.4

6.8

14

14

27

8.1

14

27

54

10

17

34

68

6.1

7.0

10

20

41

12

24

47

14

23

47

94

18

29

59

117

➀

300-volts maximum, Tungsten lamp loads include infrared lamps having Tungsten filaments.

➁

Resistive loads include electric discharge lamps such as fluorescent, mercury, vapor, etc.

J

J16



Non-Motor Loads

NEMA Contactor Ratings for Single Capacitor or Capacitor Bank Switching

Size of

Controller

At 230 Volts, 60 Hertz

2

3

4

5

6


2

Continuous

Ratings RMS

Amperes

45

90

135

270

540

3

4

5

6

45

90

135

270

540


2

3

4

5

6

45

90

135

270

540

3000

Three-Phase Rating of Capacitor

Maximum Size of Three-Phase Capacitor in kVAR or Available Current

➀

in Amperes RMS Sym.

5000 10,000 14,000 18,000 22,000

31

67

100

200

400

25

53

80

160

320

12

27

40

80

160

20

67

100

200

400

16

53

80

160

320

8

27

40

80

160

10

39

100

200

400

8

31

80

160

320

4

15

40

80

160

7

29

77

200

400

6

23

61

160

320

3

11

30

80

160

6

23

61

200

400

4

18

49

160

320

2

9

24

80

160

5

19

51

189

400

4

15

41

149

320

2

7

20

75

160

5

6

3

4

00

0

1

2

7

8

9

NEMA Contactor for Heating Loads

NEMA

Size

Continuous

Current

Rating

Amps

9

18

27

45

90

135

270

540

810

1215

2250

75

150

300

450

700

1290

575 Volts

2-Pole 3-Pole

1-Ph

5

3-Ph

9

10

15

25

50

18

25

43

86

130

260

515

775

1200

2200

20

40

60

120

240

360

540

1020

Maximum kW Ratings

➁

460 Volts

2-Pole 3-Pole

230 Volts

2-Pole 3-Pole

1-Ph

4

8

12

3-Ph

7

14

20

1-Ph

2

4

6

3-Ph

3.5

7

10

34

68

105

210

415

625

960

1740

10

20

30

60

120

180

270

510

17

34

52

105

210

315

480

880

15

30

60

90

135

255

115 Volts

2-Pole 3-Pole

1-Ph

1

3-Ph

1.75

2

3

5

10

3.5

5

8.5

17

26

52

105

155

240

440

Application of Starters for Heating and Lighting Loads

1. No Tungsten lamp loads, No transformer loads.

2. Contactor loading must meet table above.

3. Overload heaters may be sized for maximum

➂

.

4. Disconnect must be thermal magnetic or fused switch rated per NEC @ 125% of load amps.

J17

➀ Available at capacitor terminals.

➁ Applicable only to resistive loads having inrush currents not exceeding 1.5

times the continuous current rating.

③ Spectra CB will permit deletion of overload heaters for these loads.



Non-Motor Loads

Application Rated

Maximum kVA of Transformer for Primary Switching (50/60Hz)a

Catalog

Number

CL00

CL01

CL02

CL25

CL04

CL45

CL06

CL07

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CK95

CK10

CK11

CK12

Max. Peak

Closing Current

450 Amps

450 Amps

450 Amps

550 Amps

550 Amps

550 Amps

1000 Amps

1000 Amps

1000 Amps

1280 Amps

1280 Amps

1850 Amps

1850 Amps

2500 Amps

3700 Amps

7000 Amps

7000 Amps

8400 Amps

17.5

11.4

20

14.2

25

18.5

32

22.8

40

28.5

50

45.7

80

7.5

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

8.5

15

10

5

3.4

6

4.2

3.2

2.2

4.0

2.8

120V

0.6

1.1

0.8

1.5

1.2

2.2

1.8

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

Phase

1

3

1

30

20

35

22.8

40

28.5

50

37.1

12

8.5

15

11.4

20

14.2

25

17.1

26

17.2

30.3

19.7

34.6

24.6

43.3

32.0

10.4

7.2

13

10

17.3

12.3

21.6

14.7

55.4

39.5

69.3

49.4

86.6

79.2

138.6

7.0

4.8

8.6

5.9

3.8

3.1

5.5

3.8

Inrush = 20 x Normal

208V

1

240V

1.2

480V

1.7

1.9

1.4

2.6

2.0

2.2

1.7

3.0

2.5

3.1

2.4

4.2

3.5

4.5

3.7

6.5

4.5

8.0

5.7

10

6.8

6.3

5.2

9.1

6.3

11.2

8.0

14.0

9.5

65

45.7

80

57.1

100

91.4

160

91

64

112

80

140

128

224

56

40

70

52

42

28

49

32

28

20

35

24

16.8

12

21

16

55

34.2

60

48.5

85

62.8

110

85.7

150

97.1

170

160

280

25

20

35

22.8

40

28.5

50

31.3

11.2

7.8

13.7

9.7

17

12

21

14.2

600V

2.1

3.8

3.0

5.2

4.4

7.7

6.4

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CK95

CL10

CL11

CK12

CL00

CL01

CL02

CL025

CL04

CL45

CL06

CL07

Maximum Three-Phase kVAR Rating for Switching Capacitors

Catalog

Number

40

50

60

70

17

22

25

30

95

105

135

190

250

10,000 Amps RMS 22,000 Amp RMS

Maximum Available Fault Current Maximum Available Fault Current

200V

3

230V

3

460V

5

575V

5.7

200V

1.5

230V

1.5

460V

2.5

575V

2.8

435

6.5

9

12.5

4.5

6.5

9

12.5

9.5

11

15

21

11

12.5

17.5

24

2.2

3.2

4.5

6.2

2.2

3.2

4.5

6.2

4.5

5.5

7.5

10.5

5.5

6.2

8.2

12

17

22

25

30

40

50

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

30

40

45

50

65

80

100

130

165

190

260

325

400

35

50

65

70

95

120

150

175

230

288

370

450

600

8.5

11

12.5

15

20

25

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

8.5

11

12.5

15

20

25

60

70

95

105

135

190

250

15

20

22.5

25

32.5

40

100

130

165

190

260

325

400

230

288

370

450

600

17.5

25

32.5

35

47.5

60

150

175

8.75

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

9.2

16

11.4

20

14.2

25

22.8

40

6.2

4.2

7.5

5

3.7

2.8

5

3.5

2.5

1.7

3

2.1

1.6

1.1

2.0

1.4

120V

0.3

0.5

0.4

0.7

0.6

1.1

0.9

13

8.6

15.1

9.8

17.3

12.3

21.6

16.0

5.2

3.6

6.5

5.0

8.6

6.1

10.8

7.3

27.7

19.7

34.6

24.7

43.3

39.6

69.3

3.5

2.4

4.3

2.9

1.9

1.5

2.7

1.9

Inrush = 40 x Normal

208V

0.5

240V

0.6

480V

0.8

0.9

0.7

1.3

1.0

1.1

0.8

1.5

1.2

1.5

1.2

2.1

1.7

2.2

1.8

3.2

2.2

4.0

2.8

5

3.4

5.6

4.0

7.0

4.7

3.1

2.6

4.5

3.1

6

4.2

7.5

5.7

10

7.1

12.5

8.5

15

10

17.5

11.4

20

14.2

25

18.5

32

22.8

40

28.5

50

45.7

80

45

32

56

40

70

64

112

28

20

35

26

21

14

24.5

16

8.4

6.0

10.5

8.0

14

10

17.5

12

27.5

17.1

30

24.2

42.5

31.4

55

42.8

75

48.5

85

80

140

12.5

10

16

11.4

20

14.2

25

15.6

5.6

3.9

6.8

4.8

8.5

6

10.5

7.1

600V

1

1.9

1.5

2.6

2.2

3.8

3.2

J

J18

J19



Non-Motor Loads

Application Rated

Utilization in Category AC-1, General Use

3-pole Contactors

Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)

40°C

55°C

70°C

A

A

A

CL Contactors CK Contactors

00 01 02 25 04 45 06 07 08 09 10 75 08 09 95 10 11 12

25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 500 600 650

25 25 32 32 54 55 80 100 102 120 120 150 175 200 310 425 510 546

20 20 25 25 41 44 62 78 81 80 80 130 155 175 270 335 432 468

4-pole Contactors

Max. operational current at ambient temperature of: (for all voltages)

40°C

55°C

70°C

A

A

A

CL Contactors CK Contactors

01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 08 09 95 10 11 12

25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 500 550 650

25 32 40 54 70 100 110 120 175 200 310 425 462 543

20 25 28 41 52 78 88 80 155 175 270 335 462 468

Horsepower/kilowatt ratings are shown below

Catalog

Number

CL08

CL09

CL10

CK75

CK08

CK09

CK95

CK10

CK11

CK12

CL00

CL01

CL02

CL25

CL04

CL45

CL06

CL07

General

Purpose

Ratings

25

25

32

32

54

Max.

FLA

10

13.8

17.5

22,22,17

➀

32A

34,34,27

➀

55

80

100

110(O) 102 (E)

48

62

68

140 (O) 120 (E) 80

140 (O) 120 (E) 104,96,80

➀

150

175

200

310

140

156

192

302

500

600

650(E) 750 (O)

398

480

602

1 Phase-HP A

115V 230V 200V

3 Phase-HP A

230V 460V

.5 (9.8) 1.5 (10)

.75 (13.8) 2 (12)

1 (16)

1.5 (20)

3 (17)

3 (17)

2 (24)

3 (34)

3 (34)

5 (56)

5 (28)

5 (28)

7.5 (40)

10 (50)

3 (11)

3 (11)

5 (17.5)

5 (17.5)

10 (32)

10 (32)

15 (48)

20 (62)

3 (9.6)

3 (9.6)

5 (15.2)

7.5 (22)

10 (28)

10 (28)

15 (42)

20 (54)

5 (7.6)

7.5 (11)

10 (14)

15. (21)

20 (27)

25 (34)

30 (40)

40 (52)

5 (56) 15 (68)

7.5 (80) 15 (68)

10 (100) 20 (88)

10 (100) 25 (110)

20 (62)

25 (78)

30 (92)

40 (120)

25 (68)

30 (80)

40 (104)

50 (130)

50 (65)

60 (77)

75 (96)

100 (124)

15 (135) 30 (136) 50 (149.5) 60 (145)

– – 60 (169.4) 75 (192)

–

–

–

–

100 (285)

125 (358)

100 (248)

150 (360)

125 (156)

150 (180)

250 (302)

300 (361)

–

–

–

–

150 (414) 200 (480) 400 (477)

200 (552) 250 (602) 500 (590)

575V

7.5 (9)

10 (11)

!5 (17)

15 (17)

25 (27)

25 (27)

40 (41)

50 (52)

60 (62)

75 (77)

75 (77)

125 (125)

125 (125)

150 (144)

300 (289)

400 (382)

500 (472)

600 (574)

Power In

380/400V kW A

4 (9)

5.5 (12)

7.5 (18)

11 (25)

16 (32)

18.5 (40)

22 (50)

30 (65)

37 (80)

45 (95)

55 (105)

75 (154)

90 (185)

132 (250)

160 (310)

220 (420)

280 (550)

375 (700)



Publication References

Construction Equipment and Components

Publication

GEP-1100F

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

GET-2779

GEZ-7000

GET-7002

Power Break Insulated Case Circuit Breakers

GET-6211

GEZ-7001

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

GEI-86150

GEK-7310

GEZ-7002

GES-6227

GES-6228

Disconnect Switches

GET-6205

GEZ-7003

Ground Fault Protective Products

GET-2964

GEZ-7003

Panelboards

GET-6592

GEA-11316

Description

Buylog Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products

Application and Selection Guide for Molded Case Circuit Breakers

MCCB Time-Current Curves

Spectra RMS Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection and Application

Time-Current Curves

Installation and Operation Instructions

Maintenance Manual

Type AKR Time-Current Curves

Type AKR MicroVersaTrip RMS-9 Time Current Curves

MicroVersaTrip Ground Fault Time-Current Curves

Type HPC High-Pressure Contact Switches, Technical

Type HPC Time-Current Curves

Ground Break Systems

Ground Break Time-Current Curves

“A” series Tech. Specifications

A Series

Factory Automation Products

Publication➀

GE Fanuc Programmable Logic Control

GFW-0067

GE Fanuc I/O

GEK-90486

GFA-089

GFA-150

GFT-298

GFA-180

Description

Automation Solutions Catalog

Genius I/O System User’s Manual

Genius I/O System

Field Control™

VersaMax I/O

VersaMax

Motor Control Center Equipment

Publication

Spectra Series and 8000-Line MCC

DEA-036

GEF-4628

GEH-4961

Description

Spectra Series Product Brochure

8000-Line Renewal Parts Bulletin

Installation and Maintenance (Instructions)

➀ For more information visit our website at www.gefanuc.com/default2.htm


Stocking Location

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington


Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville

Charlottesville


Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

J

J20

J21



Publication References

General Purpose Controls

Publication

GEP-1260

Magnetic Motor Starters

GEA-10928

GEH-4756

GEH-4774

GEH-4806

GEH-4789

GEH-4869

GEH-5108

GEH-4757

GEH-4775

GEH-4806

GEH-4807

GEH-4839

Pilot Devices

GEA-10877

Relays and Timers

GEA-10639

GEH-4115

GEH-4120

GEH-4147

GEH-4139

GEH-6435

DET-069

Variable Speed Drives

➀

GEI-100364

GEI-100363

Solid State Starters

DET-024

GEH-5951

GEH-6533

DEH-195

DEH-208

Description

Control Catalog–Covers Full Line of Products

300-Line Magnetic Motor Starters, Descriptive

300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVNR





300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 6-9, FVNR

300-Line Instructions, Nema Size 1, FVR and 2-Speed





CR104P Push-buttons and Pilot Lights

CR122B, CR122BT, Series A Relays

CR120B AC Relays

CR120B Latched Relays

CR122B Time-Delay Relays

CR122BP Time-Delay Relays

Spectra ECM Instructions

Spectra ECM Product Brochure

AF 300P User Guide

AF 300G User Guide

ASTAT–CD

ASTAT–CD Installation Instructions

ASTAT–CD Service Instructions

ASTAT-IBP

ASTAT-IBP Service Instructions

Web Access

➀

G11/P11 Drives — www.ge.com/industrialsystem/drives/catalog/af300g11/index.htm



Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Fort Wayne

Fort Wayne

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

Bloomington

J22



Electrical Data

Motor horsepower output may also be calculated as follows:

HP = V x A x Pf x EFF

746

Rules of Thumb (Approximation)

At 1800 RPM, a motor develops a 3 lb. – ft. per HP.

At 1200 RPM, a motor develops 4.5 lb – ft. per HP.

At 460 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 1.25 amp per HP.

At 230 volts, a 3-phase motor draws 2.5 amp per HP.

Conversion Formulas

To find

Amperes when

Horsepower is known

Amperes when

Kilowatts is known

Amperes when

Kva is known

Kilowatts

Alternating Current Three-Phase

HP x 746

1.73 x V x Eff x fp

Kw x 1000

1.73 x V x pf

Kva x 1000

1.73 x V

1.73 x A x V x pf

Kva

Horsepower -

(Output)

KW (alternating current) = KVA x Power Factor

KW (direct current) = V x A x .001

1000

1.73 x A x V

1000

1.73 x A x V x Eff x pf

746

KWH = KW x Hours

HP = KW

Motor Efficiency

Values

V=Volts

A or I = Amperes (amps)

Work/P = Watts/Power

KW=Kilowatts

KwH=Kilowatt Hours

KVA=Kilovolt Amperes

Pf=Power Factor, Table

Ph= Phase Factor, Table

Ohms Law

I=E/R

R=E/I

E=IXR

P=IXE

P=IXIXR

kVAR Calculation When Motor Operating

Characteristics are Known

If motor HP, full-load power factor (PF) and efficiency (eff) are known, its easy to calculate the correct kVAR necessary to improve PF to any value.

Example

: 75HP, 3600 RPN, NEMA B motor with full-load PF of 87% and eff. of

92% corrected to 95%PF

Original PF = .87 Cos: Tan: = .567

Desired PF = .95 = Cos: Tan: = .329

Difference = .238

KW = HPx.746 or 75x.746 = 62

Eff. .902

.238 X 62 = 14.8 kVAR (use 15 kVAR)

Defining the Load

Horsepower

Rotating Motion

HP = T x N

5250

Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)

N = Speed (RPM)

HP = T x N

63,000

Linear Motion

HP = F x V

33,000

Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)

V = Velocity (FPM)

HP = F x V

396,000

Where: T = Torque (lb-in)

N = Speed (RPM)

Accelerating Torque/Force

T

A

= WK 2 x N

308t

Where: F = Force or Tension (lb)

V = Velocity (in/min)

F

A

= W x V

1933t

Where: T

A

WK 2

= Accelerating torque (lb ft)Where: F

A

= Total system inertia that

= Accelerating Force (lb-ft)

W = Weight (lb) must be accelerated.

This includes motor rotor, speed reducer (if used), and load. (lb-ft 2 )

V = Change in velocity (FPM) t = Time (sec.)

Torque

T = F x R

Where: T = Torque (lb-ft)

F = Force (lb)

R = Radius (ft)

WK

2

– reflected

Reflected WK

2

= WK

2

of Load

(Reduction Ratio)

2

This is for either belt or gear reductions.

FPM to RPM

RPM = FPM

.262 x (diameter in inches)

J



Electrical Data

Centrifugal Loads

Flow Rate:

Flow

1

Flow

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

Torque:

Pressure

:

Horsepower

:

Fans & Blowers

:

Torque

1

Torque

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

2

Pres

1

Pres

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

2

BHP

1

BHP

2

= RPM

1

= RPM

2

3

BHP = CFM x PSF

3300 x (fan efficiency)

Pumps

:

Where

:

BH = CFM x PIW


BHP = CFM x PSI


BHP = GPM x TH x (specific gravity)

3960 x (pump efficiency)

BHP = GPM x PSI x (specific gravity)

1713 x (pump efficiency)

BHP = Brake horsepower

PSF = Pounds per square foot

PIW = Pressure in inches of water guage

PSI = Pounds per square inch

GPM = Gallons per minute

TH = Total head (including friction)


Other Useful Formulas

Gear Ratio - Most Favorable

GR = WK

2

WKM

2

+ Tf

2

TM

2

+ Tf

T

M

Where: WK

2

= WK

2 of the load

WK

2

M

T f

T

M

= WK

2 of the motor

= Friction torque of the laod

= Average motor torque during acceleration

If friction torque is low compared to accelerating torque this can be reduced to:

GR = WK

2

WK

2

Duty Cycle Calculations

HP = HP

2

1 t + HP

2

2 t + HP

3 t

2

RMS t

1

+ t

2

+ t

3

+ etc

+ etc

J

J23

GET-6728F 0597 BL

General Electric Company

41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062

© 1997 General Electric Company

GE Electrical Distribution & Control

User manual | GE Spectra Series, 8000-Line motor control center Application and Selection Guide

GE Electrical Distribution & Control

Spectra Series™ and 8000-Line

Motor Control Centers

Application and

Selection Guide

General

Structure

Mains, Feeders,

Incoming Lines

Starters

Miscellaneous Units

Solid-State Drives

Components

Application Data

Typical Circuits

Specifications

Programmable Logic Control

PRODUCT FEATURES

STANDARD DESIGN FEATURES

PRODUCT FEATURES

PRODUCT FEATURES

OPTIONAL CUSTOMIZING FEATURES

Vertical Ground Bus and Unit Stab

Vertical Bus Shutter Mechanism

Power-Off Insertion or Withdrawal

Feature

New Drawing Software

Drawing Holder

Nameplates

Wire and Cable

NEMA CLASS OF DIAGRAMS AND WIRING

Motor control centers are classified by NEMA as follows:

NEMA CLASS I DEFINITION

NEMA CLASS II DEFINITION

NEMA CLASS IS AND IIS DEFINITION

WHEN TO SPECIFIY CLASS I

WHEN TO SPECIFY CLASS II

WHEN TO SPECIFY CLASS IS AND IIS

WIRING FEATURES BY NEMA CLASSIFICATION

CODES AND STANDARDS

Section Label Unit Label

SHORT CIRCUIT CONSIDERATIONS

SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS

MAIN HORIZONTAL BUS AND VERTICAL

BUS EXTENSIONS

COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROL UNITS

MAIN PROTECTIVE DEVICES

FEEDER TAP UNITS

FUSE CLASSIFICATION

FUSE CLASSIFICATIONS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

ENCLOSURE TYPES

TYPE 1–General Purpose, Indoor

TYPE 1 GASKETED–Semi Dust-tight,

Indoor

TYPE 2–Drip-proof, Indoor

TYPE 3R–Rain-proof, Outdoor

TYPE 12–Industrial Use–Dust-tight and

Drip-tight, Indoor

INDOOR ENCLOSURES

STANDARD NEMA 1 or NEMA 1 (GASKETED)

ENCLOSURES

NEMA 2 DRIP-PROOF CONSTRUCTION

NEMA 12

HOW TO DEFINE UNUSED SPACES

INDOOR ENCLOSURES

INDOOR ENCLOSURES

13” DEEP SECTION

END VIEW STANDARD 13” DEEP TOP CONDUIT ENTRANCE

DETAILS FOR STD. 13”

BOTTOM CONDUIT ENTRANCE

DETAILS FOR STD. 13”

BOTTOM CONDUIT ENTRANCE

DETAILS WHEN AUTO—TRANSFORMER

IS FURNISHED

BUS DETAILS STANDARD 13” DEEP

BAR

STANDARD GROUND AND NEUTRAL BUS DETAILS

20” DEEP SECTION